JP2019154605A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing operation at the time of power activation.SOLUTION: Control data stored in a ROM 121 is developed in advance in a RAM 122 that can be read at a high speed (steps S81 and S82). In addition, notification data stored in a voice data ROM is developed in advance in a voice RAM that can be read at a high speed (steps S83 and S85). Presentation control error determination processing is performed by using a control program for the presentation control error determination processing included in the control data developed in the processing at the steps S81 and S82. Since the notification data for making a notification of an error is developed in advance in the voice RAM at the steps S83 and S85, an error notification by voice can be made even immediately after power activation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that transfers image data from CGROM to VRAM when power supply is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the process proceeds to the next process after the transfer of the image data from the CGROM to the VRAM is completed.

JP 2009-72469 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the operation when the power is turned on becomes inappropriate.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute an operation when the power is turned on.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Control means for controlling the operation of the gaming machine (eg, CPU 120 for effect control);
Transfer means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for transferring data from the first storage means (for example, ROM 121 or voice data ROM) to the second storage means (for example, RAM 122 or voice RAM),
The transfer means transfers control data used by the control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the processing of steps S81 and S82 is executed), and notification data used for notification is used. , It is transferred with priority over the production data used to produce the production (for example, the processing of step S85 is performed after the processing of steps S83 and S84).
The control means monitors the state of the gaming machine in parallel with the transfer of the effect data (for example, executes the process of step S86 in parallel with the transfer of the effect data started in step S85). It is possible to execute notification (for example, the process of step S87) according to the state of the gaming machine using the notification data,
further,
Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200 for displaying items corresponding to a plurality of types of music as shown in FIG. 45). When,
Selection effect means (execution control microcomputer 90200 for changing an item selected by a selection operation, as shown in FIG. 45) capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items, and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means (an effect control microcomputer 90200 for outputting music and video corresponding to the selected item, as shown in FIG. 45). Etc.)
The display means can display an item corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, FIG. 45 (e) ), The item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return” even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed),
The production execution means
When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 45 (h)). As shown, when the item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning),
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in a state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over (for example, FIG. 45 ( As shown in g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).
According to such a configuration, the notification using the notification data can be executed even during the transfer of the production data, and the notification corresponding to the malfunction during the transfer of the production data can be executed. Further, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The transfer means may transfer the notification data after the transfer of the control data is completed (for example, execute the process of S83 after determining Yes in step S82).
According to such a configuration, control using the control data can be executed during the transfer of the production data.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The transfer means transfers the notification data during the transfer of the control data (for example, executes the process of step S91 after determining Yes in step S98, and then executes the process of step S99). It may be.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute notification using the notification data immediately after the power is turned on.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The transfer means may divide and transfer the effect data.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence on other processing due to the data transfer for performance.

(B) Other gaming machines of the present invention are:
A gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Control means for controlling the operation of the gaming machine (eg, CPU 120 for effect control);
Transfer means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for transferring data from the first storage means (for example, ROM 121 or voice data ROM) to the second storage means (for example, RAM 122 or voice RAM),
The transfer means transfers control data used by the control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the processing of steps S81 and S82 is executed), and notification data used for notification is used. , It is transferred with priority over the production data used to produce the production (for example, the processing of step S85 is performed after the processing of steps S83 and S84).
The control means can execute operation control of the variable display means in parallel with the transfer of the production data (for example, the processes in steps S74 to S76 in parallel with the transfer of the production data started in step S85). During the transfer of the production data, the control based on the production data is not executed (when it is determined No in step S701, the process of step S703 is executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the operation control of the variable display means even during the transfer of the production data, and it is possible to suppress problems caused by referring to the data before the transfer.

(C) Other gaming machines of the present invention are:
A gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Control means for controlling the operation of the gaming machine (eg, CPU 120 for effect control);
Transfer means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for transferring data from the first storage means (for example, ROM 121 or voice data ROM) to the second storage means (for example, RAM 122 or voice RAM),
The transfer means transfers control data used by the control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the processing of steps S81 and S82 is executed), and notification data used for notification is used. , It is transferred with priority over the production data used for production (for example, the processing of step S85 is executed after the processing of steps S91 and S92).
The control means monitors the state of the gaming machine in parallel with the transfer of the effect data (for example, executes the process of step S86 in parallel with the transfer of the effect data started in step S85). It is possible to execute notification (for example, the process of step S87) according to the state of the gaming machine using the notification data,
The notification data includes a plurality of specific notification data (for example, error notification voice data) used for performing a specific notification,
The transfer means transfers one specific notification data (for example, notification data A) before other specific notification data (for example, notification data B) (for example, the processes of steps S91 and S92 are executed) The process of step S93 is executed later).
According to such a configuration, the notification using the notification data can be executed even during the transfer of the production data, and the notification corresponding to the malfunction during the transfer of the production data can be executed.

(D) Other gaming machines of the present invention are:
A gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Control means for controlling the operation of the gaming machine (eg, CPU 120 for effect control);
Transfer means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for transferring data from the first storage means (for example, ROM 121 or voice data ROM) to the second storage means (for example, RAM 122 or voice RAM),
The transfer means transfers control data used by the control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the processing of steps S97 and S98 is executed), and the notification data used for notification is used. , It is transferred with priority over the effect data used for performing the effect (for example, the process of step S85 is executed after executing the process of steps S83, S84, S90, and S91).
The control data (for example, control data A) for monitoring the state of the gaming machine is transferred with priority over the notification data (for example, control data B) (for example, the processes of steps S97 and S98 were executed) The process of step S99 is executed later).
According to such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine can be monitored more quickly, and notification using the notification data can be executed even during the transfer of the production data, which causes a problem during the transfer of the production data. Corresponding notification can be executed.

  The modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include the inventions according to the following (5) to (12). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a player can select one of a plurality of types of demonstration effects as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-32534, and a selection operation is detected during the demonstration effects. Then, when the demo image is scroll-displayed, there is one that switches to the music corresponding to the displayed demo effect. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the selection operation is performed in a state where the demonstration effect has already been selected and the state before the selection is returned to the previous state, the music corresponding to the demonstration effect is repeated at the beginning. There was a risk that the interest would be reduced. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest is desired.

(5) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200 for displaying items corresponding to a plurality of types of music as shown in FIG. 45). When,
Selection effect means (execution control microcomputer 90200 for changing an item selected by a selection operation, as shown in FIG. 45) capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items, and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means (an effect control microcomputer 90200 for outputting music and video corresponding to the selected item, as shown in FIG. 45). Etc.)
The display means can display an item corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, FIG. 45 (e) ), The item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return” even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed),
The production execution means
When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 45 (h)). As shown, when the item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning),
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in a state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over (for example, FIG. 45 ( As shown in g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).

  According to such a configuration, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
It further includes state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous to the player,
The selection effect means can execute at least the selection effect during the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, the selection effect for selecting an item can be executed during the big hit state).

  According to such a configuration, even if the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game during the advantageous state.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above,
The selection effect is a first selection effect that is executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the advantageous state (for example, a round that is executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 45 (a)). A selection effect at the start) and a second selection effect executed based on the player's operation after the first selection effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the player's A selection effect or the like executed based on the operation).

  According to such a configuration, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effects in the advantageous state, the selection effects can be executed according to the player's preference.

(8) In the gaming machine of (7) above,
The period in which the second selection effect can be performed is longer than the first selection effect (as shown in FIG. 45, the first selection effect at the start of the round is from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. The second selection effect at the start of the third round is set from the start of the third round to the final round, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to deal with various types of players by lengthening the executable period of the second selection effect executed based on the player's operation.

(9) In the gaming machine (7) or (8) above,
The production execution means
As the plurality of kinds of effects, music can be reproduced (as shown in FIG. 45, music can be reproduced, etc.)
In the first selection effect, when the item is changed based on the player's operation, the music to be played is changed in accordance with the change of the item (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B). In addition, in the selection effect at the start of the round, when the item is changed based on the player's operation, the music to be played is changed in accordance with the change of the item),
In the second selection effect, even if the item is changed based on the player's operation, the music to be played is not changed (for example, 3 as shown in FIGS. 45 (e) and 45 (f)). In the selection effect at the start of the round, even if the item is changed based on the player's operation, the reproduced music does not change).

  According to such a structure, since music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(10) In any of the above gaming machines (7) to (9),
In the second selection effect, the display means displays an item corresponding to the currently executed effect in a different mode from the display of the item when the first selection effect is being executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 45 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the item corresponding to the currently executed music is “return” different from the display of “A” in the selection effect at the start of the round. Display etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily indicate to the player which effect is currently being performed.

(11) In any of the gaming machines (7) to (10) above,
Hold storage means (for example, the RAM 9055 of the game control microcomputer 90560) for storing information related to the variable display as hold information (for example, hold storage, etc.);
Determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560 or the like) capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled after execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold information before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold information. When,
In the advantageous state, when the holding information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the holding storage unit based on the determination result of the determining unit, the advantageous state is controlled. A notification effect means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a reserved continuous effect, etc.) to be notified in advance;
The notification production means is
The notification effect can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings during the advantageous state (for example, the hold continuous effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during the round),
As one timing among the plurality of timings, the notification effect can be executed at a timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items in the first selection effect (for example, a plurality of timings). As one of the timings, it is possible to execute the hold continuous effect at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected).

  According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised in the first selection effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the second selection effect, the notification effect may be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (9) to (11) above,
The production execution means reproduces a specific part that is a part of the selected music at the time of the selection production and is different from the head of the music (for example, reproduces a chorus part, etc.)
The display means can select a selectable image (for example, the selectable music image 9096 of FIG. 47) that can specify a selectable music (for example, the first to third music in FIG. 47) and still not selectable. A non-selectable image (for example, the non-selectable music image 9097 of FIG. 47) that can specify a specific music (for example, the fourth to sixth music in FIG. 47) (for example, FIG. 47 (A) and the like.

  According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value for games counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process of a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process of a modification. It is a figure which shows the data name and the content of data. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is an effect drawing which shows the effect performed during a big hit. It is an effect drawing which shows the effect performed during a rush. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit related process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a rush. It is a timing chart which shows the process in the big hit in the modification. It is an effect drawing which shows the effect performed during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit time music selection process. It is a figure which shows the example of a music selection control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a music selection process.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B is used. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a holding memory display (holding display) for displaying the variable display holding number (special drawing holding memory number) corresponding to the special figure game in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. The on-hold storage display in the start winning memory display area 5H is generated based on the starting winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the first starting winning opening, or the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening. The display mode (for example, display color and shape) may be varied depending on whether the start is based on passing (entering) or not.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a changing special figure display area 5I is provided on the left side of the start winning storage display area 5H. In the changing special map display area 5I, an image corresponding to the currently executed variable display is displayed. The display corresponding to the currently executed variable display is also referred to as a running display, an active display, a variable display compatible display, or the like. The in-execution display and the on-hold storage display are collectively referred to as a specific display. During the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, the round special figure display area 5I is executed. Medium display is displayed. In addition, during the execution of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, a circular symbol is displayed in the changing symbol display area 5I. A running display is displayed. That is, with the establishment of the first or second start condition, the display removed from the start winning memory display area 5H is shifted to the changing special figure display area 5I and displayed. By displaying the changing special symbol display area 5I, the player may be able to grasp whether the special symbol game is being executed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. Good. Note that the size and shape of the hold storage display and the execution display may be different.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, the normal symbol display 20 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied after the general symbol start condition for the normal symbol start is satisfied. The usual game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, a special game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable symbol display time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the variable symbol variable symbol is displayed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit as a specific gaming state (advantageous state, specific state) in which a round advantageous to the player (also called “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times Controlled to gaming state. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the number of executions of the round being the second round number less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects are executed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side. Whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the side of the effect control board 12 may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the side of the main board 11.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2” of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols is displayed. )) In the decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and then the display is stopped and displayed again. An effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. Thus, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a predetermined number of decorative symbols are displayed after temporary display of a plurality of decorative symbols from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the display of a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is re-executed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, one of a plurality of types of pseudo-ream chances determined in advance in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result. Thereafter, pseudo continuous variation (re-variable display) is performed. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  As a variable display effect using such a decorative symbol variable display operation, various effect operations may be executed in addition to “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous”.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message is displayed as an image, an audio output, a lamp There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the decorative symbol variable display operation such as lighting, or a reach effect may be executed by super reach. In addition, a notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that the variable display result may be a “hit”. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read notice). The pre-reading notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information of the special game before starting the variable display for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is to be notified. is there. In particular, the pre-reading notice effect that continuously predicts the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” over the variable display of decorative symbols executed multiple times in response to multiple special drawing games is a continuous notice effect. Also called.

  As a pre-reading notice effect, a variable display to be a notice target is changed by changing the hold memory display that displays the number of special figure hold memories in the start winning memory display area 5H in a display manner different from the normal display manner. A hold display advance notice may be executed to notify the possibility of a “big hit” in FIG. For example, a hold display notice for displaying the hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H in a special mode different from the normal display mode at a predetermined timing may be executed.

  In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H, a pre-reading notice effect may be executed also in the changing special figure display area 5I. In this embodiment, the reserved memory display removed from the start winning memory display area 5H corresponding to the fact that the hold has been consumed is shifted and displayed in the changing special figure display area 5I. When the hold-and-hold display is performed in the special manner in the start winning memory display area 5H, and the shift to the changing special figure display area 5I is performed, the in-execution display in the changing special figure display area 5I is also a special aspect. You may make it do. By doing in this way, even if it is a case where a prefetch notice effect is performed in the stage where there are few numbers of reservation memory, the opportunity for a display mode to change to a special mode can be increased, and the interest of a game improves.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display is executed separately from such a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the variation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result. A notice effect during a change in which the possibility of becoming a notice is announced is executed. The in-flight notice effect may be anything that gives a notice of the possibility of a “hit” by displaying the effect image, outputting the sound, turning on the lamp, the action of the effect item, or a combination thereof.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the special opening game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed or without a reach effect, a predetermined normal big hit combination (“non-probability variable big hit combination) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations ”) Is displayed in a stopped manner. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. Ornamental symbols having even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” that constitute a normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time-shortening control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state is finished and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “normal”, or after the reach effect is not executed, a plurality of types of jackpot combinations Among them, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. Any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. The decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decoration symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a normal state or a low base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-purpose game can be executed frequently and the variable display result in each special-purpose game will be “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state (special state).

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. After that, a fixed decorative pattern (a fixed decorative pattern serving as a chance corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the short time control.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  If the winning symbol is opened after the final decorative symbol composing the opening chance is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accurate” There is a case where it is controlled to a short hit big hit state based on that, and a case where it is controlled to a small hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. On the other hand, the winning winning opening is opened after the definite decorative symbols constituting the reach combination are derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbols. The variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “exact” Only when it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state. Therefore, the confirmed decorative symbols that make up the opening chances correspond to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit gaming state, while the fixed decorative symbols of the reach combination are short-term open big hit states It corresponds to being controlled by.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are displayed temporarily on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “left ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the same decorative symbols in the same state, and then fluctuate again. One of the decorative symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the normal jackpot combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is displayed. A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state, one round ends in the jackpot gaming state and the next round starts During the big hit that will be a promising change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state until the start of the next variable display game A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the last round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol is variably displayed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of the turn-on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The effect control board 12 is provided with an audio data ROM for storing audio data and an audio RAM for expanding the audio data. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. Further, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and an ordinary diagram hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The different EXT data is set in accordance with the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types in the case of "". More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying the advance determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating decorative symbol variation stop (determination) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted.

  The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the first special figure reserved memory number when the first start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning. Further, the second reserved memory count notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the second special figure reserved memory count when the second start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning.

  In this embodiment, a first start opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is selected as the hold storage information is transmitted. At the same time, a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. In addition, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” as the winning determination result, and whether or not the big hit type is determined. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) as to which range of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type falls as a winning determination result.

  In this embodiment, in the random number determination process at the time of winning, based on the occurrence of the start winning, whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit”, whether the big hit It is determined which range of determination values the random value MR3 for determining the type and variation pattern type falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small jackpot” and a value for designating the big hit type are set. Control to send. Further, a value for designating a range of a determined value in which the random value MR3 as the determination result is included in the EXT data of the variation category command is set, and control for transmission to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command, Based on the value set in the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is included in the predetermined range of determination values.

  As an example of the symbol designating command, the command C400H is the first symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”, and the command C401H is the variable display result “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. And the command C402H is the third symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and the command C403H is the variable symbol display result “big hit”. ”Is a fourth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the big hit type is“ surprise ”, and the command C404H is a fifth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is“ small hit ”. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the variable display result notification command may be shared.

  Note that the command shown in FIG. 3A is a part of the effect control command in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and in addition, the main board 11 notifies the effect control board 12 that an error has occurred (error An error command (designating execution of notification) is also provided.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit" or not. This is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”. Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”.

  Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 5 may be included in at least one variation pattern type among a plurality of predetermined variation pattern types. Each variation pattern type may be configured to include a single variation pattern or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, a mode of a rendering operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols.

  As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach A variation pattern type including a pattern and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (super reach α or super reach β) may be used. Further, the variation patterns with super reach may be classified into different variation pattern types according to the contents of the reach effect (for example, whether it is super reach α or super reach β). Or you may make it classify | categorize into a different variation pattern classification according to whether a predetermined variable display production is performed or not. As another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a special figure display is made depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination table 130B A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the first special figure display result decision table 130A and the second special figure display result decision table 130B, the table data indicating the decision value to be compared with the random value MR1 for special figure display result decision indicates the special figure display result as “big hit”. ”Is data for determination assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state, compared to when it is in a normal state or a short time state. Therefore, the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determined values (a value in the range of “30000” to “30350”) is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, The case where the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. The ratio determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state as “small hit” can be varied.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” and the small hit game state is controlled. In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a state (highly accurate high base state), frequent occurrence of a small hit gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to an extended game. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table 130A are assigned to the special chart display result of “small hit”. Also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. In this way, when the high base state such as the short-time state or the probability change state is set, the proportion determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state may be lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the short-time probability change state is used. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second). Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a plurality of values such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change” Assigned to the type of jackpot type.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the predetermined value (a value in the range of “83” to “100”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure Is the second special figure, no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In the gaming state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to the extended game. .

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of determined values different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  In addition, the ROM 101 determines a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a special figure display result, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, and a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern. A variation pattern determination table to be referred to is stored.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the start winning (first start winning) has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates with a reservation number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  The second special figure storage unit 151B has been started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a start winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The universal figure storage unit 151 </ b> C stores the general game holding information that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software.

  For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, A wiring for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, an effect control pattern when a special figure changes, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. Consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations such as variable display operations of decorative symbols, reach effects, re-drawing effects, etc., or various effect display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols Has been. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the special-figure variation production control pattern, for example, a plurality of types of reach production control patterns with different production modes in each reach production may be included for each variation pattern that executes the reach production.

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as a special control change effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various performance operations, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various performance controls, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control CPU 120. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to blink a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration LED in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to determine the content of the effect by accepting an operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern (special-figure variation effect control pattern) based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. The effect control CPU 120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when the execution of the notice effect is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the effect lamp 9 and a light emitting body such as a decoration LED, a movable member provided in the production model, etc. is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, a start opening prize designation command (first start slot prize designation command or second start slot prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command , And a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start area winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. The category command and the stored memory number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “6”.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) each time variable symbol display is started. Is deleted from the stored contents, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when variable display of a new decorative design is started, each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted, and the command corresponding to the buffer number “2” is deleted. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “6” is changed to the buffer number. The region is shifted to a region corresponding to “2” to “5”.

  In the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, for the area corresponding to the buffer number “6”, the command reception cannot be performed normally, and an example in which the pending storage number notification command is missed is shown. Has been. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 10B, the content in the fourth storage area where the reserved storage number notification command should be stored is “0000 (H)”, corresponding to the buffer number “6”. It remains.

  Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning command (start opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command and pending memory number notification command) stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A Or, a pre-reading notice pattern for execution is determined. At this time, if the command at the time of starting winning is missed or inconsistent, the pre-reading notice effect setting is not performed until the variable information of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Limited to When a command for starting a prize is received during a period in which the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted (during pre-reading notice restriction), the pre-reading notice effect setting is not performed at that reception timing. The determination information is set to “1” (or on state). In the case of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect of all aspects may not be executed for the pre-reading notice effect that targets the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred within a predetermined period. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice effect of some aspects may not be executed.

  In the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B, each buffer number (holding number) is stored with a “holding display mode” indicating the display mode of the hold storage display. When the value of the “hold display mode” is “0”, the display mode is a normal display mode, and when the value is “1” or “2”, it indicates a special mode different from the normal display mode. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect of the notice display notice is executed, a special mode is set.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (steps). S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables the setting of tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a random number value (for example, random number values MR1 to MR3) is extracted based on the fact that there is a new winning at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and the extracted random number value is set to the first winning winning determination process. A process of setting in the first special figure storage unit 151A or the second special figure storage unit 151B is executed. In addition, a process of determining a display result and a variation pattern type (variation category) in advance based on the extracted random number value (a winning random number determination process) is also executed. Then, settings for transmitting the start opening winning designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the symbol designation command, and the variation category command are performed.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (the big hit symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. In this embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). ). Therefore, in the special symbol normal process, when the execution condition of the special figure game using the first special figure and the execution condition of the special figure game using the second special figure are established (first special figure holding memory) In the case where the hold data is stored in the part 151A and the second special figure storage unit 151B), control for preferentially establishing the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. On the other hand, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the winning order (both the winning order digestion). Say).

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, variation is performed using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Processing for determining the pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and processing for determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern based on the determination result of the variation pattern type Etc. are included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal processing in step S110 and the variation pattern setting processing in step S111, a fixed special symbol that results in variable display of the special symbol and a variation pattern including the variable symbol display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol are determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed as follows. It includes processing for determining the variable display mode of special symbols and decorative symbols using MR4.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, in response to the big hit type of “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds” and the upper prize is set to the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening of the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A process of waiting until time elapses, a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the presentation device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 13 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  After executing the initialization process, the control data (control program used by the effect control CPU 120, various tables, effect control patterns, etc.) stored in the ROM 121 is transferred to the RAM 122 and expanded (steps). S81). Then, it waits until the transfer of the control data is completed (step S82).

  In this embodiment, the control data stored in the ROM 121 is expanded in advance in the RAM 122 that can be read at high speed. The effect control CPU 120 reads control data from the RAM 122. By doing so, the control data can be read at a higher speed than reading the control data from the ROM 121, and a delay due to data transfer can be prevented.

  When the transfer of the control data is completed (step S82; Yes), a process of transferring and expanding the notification data (error notification voice data) stored in the voice data ROM to the voice RAM is started (step S83). ). And it waits until the transfer of the data for notification is completed (step S84).

  In this embodiment, the notification data stored in the audio data ROM is developed in advance in an audio RAM that can be read at high speed. The effect control CPU 120 reads control data from the audio RAM. In this way, the notification data can be read out at a higher speed than reading out the notification data from the audio data ROM, and a delay due to data transfer can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the notification data among the audio data stored in the audio data ROM is first developed in the audio RAM. As other audio data stored in the audio data ROM, there is audio data for production (production data). As described above, by developing the notification data first, even when an error is detected immediately after the power is turned on, the error can be notified appropriately.

  When the transfer of the notification data is completed (step S84; Yes), a process of transferring and expanding the production data (production audio data) stored in the audio data ROM to the audio RAM is started (step S85). . Then, the process proceeds to the next process without waiting for the completion of the transfer of the production data. That is, the presentation data is transferred in parallel with other processing (steps S72 to S76 and S86 to S90 described later). In addition, since the process after step S72 is performed repeatedly in a loop, it is also called the loop process of the production control main process.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software.

  Subsequent to the effect random number update process, a process (effect control error determination process) for determining whether or not an error in the effect control board 12 is detected is executed (step S86). In the effect control error determination process, for example, it is determined whether or not there is an error that may occur on the effect control board 12 side, such as an activation error of an accessory (movable object, special screen device, etc.), an operation means or a vibration motor abnormality error. If an error is detected, the corresponding error flag is set to the on state.

  The effect control error determination process is executed using a control program for an effect control error determination process included in the control data developed in steps S81 and S82. In this embodiment, since the control program for effect control error determination processing is expanded in advance before entering the loop processing, an error immediately after the power is turned on can be suitably determined.

  Subsequent to the effect control error determination process, an error notification process is executed (step S87). In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11 or when an error in the effect control board 12 is detected in step S86, an error notification corresponding to the error is issued. Execute. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. Note that the notification data for notifying the error is previously developed in the voice RAM in steps S83 and S85, so that the error notification by voice is possible even immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, even when an error occurs immediately after the power is turned on, the error can be suitably notified.

  Subsequent to the effect control error determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the completion flag is on (step S88). The completion flag is a flag indicating that the development of the production data to the audio RAM is completed.

  When the completion flag is in the off state (step S88; No), it is determined whether or not the development of the production data into the audio RAM is completed (step S89). If the development of the effect data to the audio RAM has been completed (step S89; Yes), the completion flag is set to the on state (step S90).

  After executing the process of step S90, when the completion flag is in the on state (step S88; Yes), or when the development of the production data to the audio RAM is not completed (step S89; No), step S72 Return to the process.

  When the production data is transferred from the audio data ROM to the audio RAM, the production data may be divided and transferred instead of transferring all at once. In this case, a part of the effect data is transferred in step S85, and in step S89, it is determined whether or not the development of the part of the effect data in the audio RAM is completed. If the development of the part of the effect data into the audio RAM is completed, transfer of the next effect data is started. In this way, the production data may be divided and transferred sequentially. When the development of all the production data is completed, the completion flag may be set to the on state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent data bus congestion and freeze due to batch transfer of large-capacity data. In addition, it is possible to facilitate retry when data transfer fails.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 13 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a specific display for displaying a hold display or a running display (specific display) in the start winning memory display area 5H or the changing special map display area 5I. Processing is executed (step S161).

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control performs one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the main board 11. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Various effects are controlled during variable display. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the special symbol variation effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to the above, the final decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is displayed. Even if it does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the effect control board 12 side. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. Also, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls in the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decorative LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is executed in the big hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LEDs for use. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S171 of FIG. 14 as the effect control data setting processing. In the effect control data setting process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the completion flag is on (step S701). The completion flag indicates whether or not the development of the production data into the audio RAM has been completed.

  When the completion flag is in the on state (step S701; Yes), normal effect control data is set (step S702), and the effect control data setting process is finished.

  When the completion flag is not in the on state (step S701; No), the production control data without sound is set (step S703), and the production control data setting process is finished. As described above, when the development of the production data (production audio data) to the audio RAM is not completed, the production control data designating that the audio data is to be read is set. There is a risk that audio data that cannot be referred to may cause a malfunction. Therefore, production control data without sound is set. By doing so, the game can be executed in parallel with the transfer of the production data, and a problem caused by referring to data that has not been transferred can be prevented. It should be noted that the presentation control data without sound includes display control data for displaying on the image display device 5 characters (for example, “reading voice data ...”) to which the voice data is being transferred. Also good. The production control data without sound may be exclusive production control data before the production data is transferred. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrusted even if an effect relating to variable display is executed without sound.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, when all the notification data (error notification voice data) is expanded in the voice RAM when the power is turned on, the loop process of the production control main process is started. A part of the notification data that can be executed at least can be developed in the audio RAM, and then the loop process of the effect control main process can be started (the process proceeds).

  In the above-described embodiment, all control data (control program used by the CPU 120 for effect control, various tables, effect control patterns, etc.) is expanded in the RAM 122 when the power is turned on, and then the loop process of the effect control main process is performed. However, it is also possible to enter the loop process of the effect control main process (the process proceeds) after developing the minimum necessary control data in the RAM 122.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a production control main process of a modification in which a part of the notification data is expanded in the audio RAM and then enters the loop process of the production control main process. In FIG. 16, the same step number is assigned to the same process as the effect control main process of the above embodiment, and the description is omitted.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 16, when the transfer of the control data is completed (step S82; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is notification data that is part of the notification data stored in the audio data ROM. A process of transferring A to the audio RAM and expanding it is started (step S91). Then, it waits until the transfer of the notification data A is completed (step S92).

  When the transfer of the notification data A is completed (step S92; Yes), a process for transferring and expanding the production data to the audio RAM is started (step S85), and the notification data stored in the audio data ROM is updated. The process of transferring the remaining notification data B to the audio RAM and expanding it is started (step S93).

  The notification data A may be audio data that can execute a minimum error notification. For example, when there are a plurality of types of audio data for informing the same error, one type of audio data for informing one error is the informing data A and other types of informing for the one error. The audio data may be the notification data B.

  For example, when there is error notification sound data corresponding to a plurality of characters (such as effect mode) as the notification data, the notification data A is the character of the error notification sound data as shown in FIG. It is audio data corresponding to A, and the notification data B may be audio data corresponding to other than the character A in the error notification audio data.

  In this way, since only the necessary notification data is expanded and the process proceeds, the process can proceed to the loop process more quickly, and the process (steps S74 to S76) for performing the production more quickly Error processing (steps S86 and S87) can be executed.

  In the process of FIG. 16, when the completion flag is in an off state (step S88; No), it is determined whether or not the completion flag 2 is in an on state (step S94). The completion flag 2 is a flag indicating that the development of the notification data B into the audio RAM has been completed.

  When the completion flag 2 is in the off state (step S94; No), it is determined whether or not the development of the notification data B into the audio RAM is completed (step S95). If the development of the notification data B into the audio RAM has been completed (step S95; Yes), the completion flag 2 is set to the on state (step S96), and the process returns to step S72. If the development of the notification data B to the audio RAM has not been completed (step S95; No), the processing returns to step S72.

  When the completion flag 2 is in an off state, that is, when error notification using the notification data is performed in step S87 before the completion of the development of the notification data B, the notification is performed using the notification data B ( Even in the production mode and the like, the same content may be notified using the notification data A. By doing in this way, even when an error occurs immediately after the power is turned on, since the minimum notification data A is developed in advance, an error notification by voice can be executed. In addition, the process may proceed to the loop process at an earlier stage than the case where the process proceeds to the loop process after waiting for the development of all the notification data (the process for executing the effect and the error notification process can be executed). it can.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process according to a modification in which a part of the control data is expanded in the RAM 122 and enters the loop process of the effect control main process in addition to the process of FIG. In FIG. 17, the same process as the effect control main process of FIG. In addition to the processing in FIG. 13, a part of the control data may be expanded in the RAM 122 before entering the loop processing of the effect control main processing. That is, all the notification data in FIG. 17 may be transferred in advance.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 17, following the initialization process of S71, the effect control CPU 120 transfers the control data A, which is part of the control data stored in the ROM 121, to the RAM 122 for expansion. Is started (step S97). Then, it waits until the transfer of the control data A is completed (step S98).

  When the transfer of the control data A is completed (step S98; Yes), the process proceeds to step S91. Thereafter, before entering the loop process, a process of transferring and expanding the control data B, which is the remaining control data stored in the ROM 121, to the RAM 122 is started (step S99).

  The control data A may be data that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 with minimum control. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, the control program used by the effect control CPU 120 (a program corresponding to a process included in the loop process of the effect control main process such as an error monitoring program) is the control data A, and Control data such as a table and a production control pattern (control pattern data for lamps and accessories) may be the control data B.

  By doing in this way, since only the necessary control data A is expanded and the process proceeds, it is possible to proceed to the loop process more quickly, and the process for performing the production more quickly (steps S74 to S76). Alternatively, error processing (steps S86 and S87) can be executed. Even when an error occurs immediately after the power is turned on, the control data A for error processing is developed in advance, so that suitable error determination and notification can be executed. In addition, the process proceeds to the loop process at an earlier stage than the case where the process proceeds to the loop process after waiting for the development of all the control data (the process for executing the effect and the error notification process can be executed). it can.

  In the process of FIG. 17, when the completion flag is in an off state (step S88; No), it is determined whether or not the completion flag 3 is in an on state (step S100). The completion flag 3 is a flag indicating that the development of the control data B into the RAM 122 has been completed.

  If the completion flag 3 is off (step S100; No), it is determined whether or not the development of the control data B to the RAM 122 has been completed (step S101). If the development of the control data B to the RAM 122 has been completed (step S101; Yes), the completion flag 3 is set to the on state (step S102), and the process returns to step S72. If the development of the control data B to the RAM 122 has not been completed (step S101; No), the process returns to step S72. If the completion flag 3 is on (step S100; Yes), the process proceeds to step S94.

  In the case where the completion flag 3 is in the off state, if the processing or effect using the control data B is executed, the control may be performed so that the effect that does not use the control data B is executed. For example, what is necessary is just to alert | report that the alternative production and the control data B are transferring.

  In the above-described embodiment, the notification data and the production data are described as audio data, but may be image data or video data. Further, the control data is transferred from the ROM 121 to the RAM 122, and the notification data and the effect data are transferred from the voice data ROM to the voice RAM. The data transfer destination storage means (RAM) may be one or three or more.

  For example, the effect control board 12 is provided with a plurality of ROMs such as a ROM 121 for storing programs for effect control, fixed data, etc., an audio data ROM for storing audio data, and a CGROM for storing image data. You may make it memorize | store in ROM. Also, since image (video) data has a large data capacity, a large-capacity RAM is required if all image data is to be expanded in advance in the RAM. Therefore, only a part of the image data may be developed in the RAM in advance, and the other image data may be read each time it is used. In this case, the image data previously developed in the RAM may be an image that is frequently used. In this way, high-speed image display control can be realized.

  One RAM may be used for developing various data, and control data, notification data (audio data), and image data may be developed in one RAM. In this case, the development destination of various data may be random, or an area (address) to be developed for each data may be determined in advance. By predetermining the area to be developed for each data, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of bugs during data transfer and simplify the processing.

  When storing control data, notification data (sound data), and image data in one ROM, if the control data, notification data (sound data), and image data are read each time they are used, the ROM and The amount of data bus communication between CPUs increases, and the time for which the data bus is occupied by the data to be transferred is long, which may cause delays in data transfer and congestion. At least a part of the control data, notification data (sound data), and image data stored in one ROM is preliminarily developed in the RAM, thereby preventing such data transfer delays and traffic jams. be able to.

  Also, a plurality of RAMs may be provided, and control data, notification data (audio data), and image data may be developed in parallel on the plurality of RAMs. Then, the control data, the notification data (audio data), and the image data may be read from the expanded RAM. In this way, various data can be read from a plurality of RAMs, so that the data reading speed can be improved.

  The control pattern data of the lamp and the accessory included in the control data may not be expanded in the RAM in advance, but may be expanded in the RAM every time it is used. If the capacity of the area where the data on the RAM can be expanded is larger than the capacity of the data read from the ROM, the new data may be overwritten and expanded. By doing so, it is not necessary to increase the capacity of the RAM, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The effect control board 12 may be modularized as a separate board (for example, a CPU + RAM board, a ROM board, an I / O board, etc.) for each component. By doing in this way, a board | substrate can be comprised by combining a module according to a function (the number and capacity | capacitance of ROM and RAM, a difference in I / O). In addition, the parts can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiments and modifications, at least a part of the notification data transfer is waited for and the process proceeds to the loop process. However, after the notification data transfer is started, the process proceeds to the loop process. Good. In this case, if an error occurs before the transfer of the notification data is completed, the fact that the error has occurred is stored, and error notification by voice using the notification data is executed after the transfer of the notification data is completed. It may be. By doing so, it becomes possible to detect an error more quickly and to notify the error using the notification data after the transfer of the notification data is completed.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub-side) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change is made when the change is started. Although an example in which a pattern command is transmitted has been shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) is so-called in the case where the first command is not reached, such as the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, the presence or absence of a sliding effect, etc. A command (for example, a previous variation pattern designation command) indicating the variation time and variation mode (for example, the previous variation pattern) of the second stop) is transmitted, and in the second command, the type of reach, the presence / absence of a redrawing effect, etc. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation time or a variation mode (for example, a post-variation pattern) after reaching reach (after the so-called second stop when the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. .

  In this case, the effect control board may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing may be selected by the effect control board. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the hold storage display in the pre-reading notice effect is generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, or the second Although it was the same regardless of whether the game ball was generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the game winning opening, the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening The display mode (color, shape, etc.) depends on whether it is generated based on the start winning or based on the starting winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the second start winning opening. ) May be different.

  When the gaming state is in a probable change state, it is determined that the variable display result is determined as “big hit” using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning prize In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot type is determined to be “non-probable change” using the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and it is determined that the probability change control is not performed after the jackpot gaming state ends, You may restrict execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning which occurred within the period until probability change control is complete | finished based on the display result in the variable display used as object. As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the determination result that the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” using the special determination data corresponding to the probability variation state, even though the probability variation control ends. It is possible to prevent this and to maintain the consistency of the production contents.

  In the above embodiment, the special game using the first special figure is executed based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening, and the game that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening. The description has been made on the assumption that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed based on the detection of the sphere. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game using a common special symbol is executed regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It may be a thing.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various presentation operations including the display operation of the presentation image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid game ball (which may be a rental ball) into the game area to play a game. Although it was a gaming machine, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values having a size specified by the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention is also applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a given game score or a game score given by winning a game. Can do.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  Only one type of deviated symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “-”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. . Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above embodiment, the prefetch determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub side, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the prefetch determination is performed on the sub side. You may do it.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not to change the gaming state after the big hit gaming state to the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the fluctuation is determined. Round mode) is determined only (specify by type of jackpot, etc.), and the jackpot game is based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the jackpot game state. The game state after the state may be changed to the “probability change state”.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a game, and a control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) for controlling the operation of the gaming machine, Transfer means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for transferring data from storage means (for example, ROM 121 or voice data ROM) to second storage means (for example, RAM 122 or voice RAM), and the transfer means has power for the gaming machine. The control data used by the control means when the supply is started (for example, the processes of steps S81 and S82 are executed), and the notification data used for notification is used for presentation. The data is transferred with priority over the data (for example, the processing of step S85 is performed after the processing of steps S83 and S84), and the control means The state of the gaming machine is monitored in parallel with the transfer of outgoing data (for example, the process of step S86 is executed in parallel with the transfer of presentation data started in step S85), and the notification data is used. Notification means (for example, the process of step S87) according to the state of the gaming machine can be executed, and display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, FIG. 45). As shown, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that displays items corresponding to a plurality of types of music, and a selection effect means that can execute a selection effect that selects any one of the plurality of items (FIG. 45). As shown in the figure, the effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that changes the item selected by the selection operation) and the item selected by the selection effect means And an effect execution means (such as an effect control microcomputer 90200 for outputting music and video corresponding to the selected item as shown in FIG. 45) capable of executing effects corresponding to Can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (e)). In this way, even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as “return”, etc.), the effect execution means executes the first effect. When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected, the second effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. Corresponds to a different song B When the item B is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning), and when the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again while the first effect is being executed, the music B is being executed. There is a gaming machine that takes over and executes the state of the first effect (for example, when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the music A is played as it is). .

  According to such a configuration, the notification using the notification data can be executed even during the transfer of the production data, and the notification corresponding to the malfunction during the transfer of the production data can be executed. Further, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, instead of sound output corresponding to the state of the gaming machine (for example, error sound output when an error occurs) as notification performed using the notification data according to the state of the gaming machine, In addition to the sound output according to the state, a display according to the state of the gaming machine on the display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, an error display in an error occurrence state) ) May be performed. If the timing for displaying according to the state of the gaming machine overlaps with the timing for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects selectable by the player, the plurality of items are not displayed. The selection effect may not be performed, and depending on the display of a plurality of items and the state of the gaming machine as long as the display according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, an error display in the error occurrence state) can be recognized The display may be performed together. In addition, in the case where display and sound output (for example, error display and error sound output in an error occurrence state) are performed as notification according to the state of the gaming machine, the timing for performing display according to the state of the gaming machine is If it overlaps with the timing to display multiple items corresponding to multiple types of effects that can be selected, priority is given to the display of multiple items, and display according to the state of the gaming machine is not performed, depending on the state of the gaming machine It is also possible to switch to only the sound output (for example, error sound output when an error occurs).

  Furthermore, notification using the notification data can be executed even during the transfer of the production data, the notification corresponding to the malfunction during the transfer of the production data can be executed, and the selected production is selected again. Even in this case, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in the interest of the game, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that performs a game, and a plurality of types that can be selected by the player Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to effects (for example, an effect control microcomputer 90200 for displaying items corresponding to a plurality of types of music as shown in FIG. 45), and any of the plurality of items Selection effecting means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting the item (as shown in FIG. 45, an effect control microcomputer for changing the item selected by the selection operation) 0200, etc.) and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selection effect means (the effect of outputting music and outputting video corresponding to the selected item as shown in FIG. 45) And the display means displays items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (e), even if the item corresponding to the song A is being executed, the item corresponding to the song A can be displayed as “return”). When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the effect executing means executes the second effect (for example, , FIG. h), when an item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning), and the first effect is being executed. When the item corresponding to the effect is selected again, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over and executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45G, the item corresponding to the music A is again displayed). If selected, the music A is played as it is). Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 19 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) 901 viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, or the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 906).

  As shown in FIG. 19, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 902. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903, an extra ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 for emitting hitting balls are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 907 is formed on the front surface of the game board 906 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 909 has a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition that is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display section 909a) for variably displaying an effect decoration pattern (first decoration pattern) (hereinafter also referred to as variation display or variation) and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second. A plurality of types of decorative designs (second decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other based on the establishment of the second starting condition, which is an execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014) is variable. It is easier for the player to visually recognize the display content than the display area (hereinafter referred to as the second variable display portion 909b) for displaying and displaying the display result, and the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b. Na Display region (hereinafter, referred to as performance symbol display unit 909c.) And there is. Note that easy to visually recognize the display content is, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display content in the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b is always monochromatic. The display color may change. In this embodiment, identification information (hereinafter also referred to as effect symbols) is displayed and controlled in the three display areas of left, middle, and right in the effect symbol display unit 909c. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping and displaying the symbol. In this embodiment, one effect symbol display unit 909c is provided for two variable display portions (first variable display portion 909a and second variable display portion 909b), and two variable symbols are displayed in the effect symbol display portion 909c. Since an effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the display unit is executed, the status of the decorative symbol (for example, whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) ) Is difficult to grasp.

  A first special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display device 908b that variably display special symbols as identification information are provided on the top of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. Has been. The first special symbol display unit 908a and the second special symbol display unit 908b are provided with a larger number of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol. It may be configured to variably display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Some of them may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first special symbol. Different characters may be included.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved memory (the stored memory is also referred to as start memory or start winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 9018a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of reserved storage. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 9018b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 908a. In addition, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 908b. Here, in this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 908a and the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 908b can be variably displayed at the same time.

  The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 909a is sometimes referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 909b is sometimes referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be collectively referred to as a decorative design. Note that the type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative design includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than the numbers, and the second decorative design is a character other than the numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative design. Different characters may be included.

  On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of effective winning balls entered into the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number, and the number of effective winning balls entered into the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserved memory number. There is an area (hereinafter referred to as symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) that displays the total number (the total number of hold storage). Thus, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol hold memory display unit 9018c that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold memory display 9018a and the second special symbol hold memory display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold memory display unit 9018c, respectively. Although configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display of another aspect may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 9018a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 9018b is composed of one display, and the display color is different according to the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. I will let you.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit 9018c increases the number of display areas to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Or among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as the effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Therefore, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. If the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are an example. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning port 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the first start opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a. An operation gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the operation gate 9017 is detected by the operation gate switch 9017a.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the game ball passes through the operating gate 9017, and the operating gate switch On the condition that it is detected at 9017a, it is configured to shift to a big hit game. Therefore, when the player rests the game after the end of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to limit the control to the big hit gaming state during the rest of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the variation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes as described later, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the player can There is a case where it takes a break. Even in such a case, even if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, it is possible to restrict the big hit game from progressing during the break, and the player's profit is impaired. Can be prevented. Although this embodiment shows a case where the operation gate 9017 is provided separately from the gate 9032, the gate 9032 and the operation gate 9017 may be configured as a common gate. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 9017. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be shifted to the big hit game after the symbol fixed display time has passed.

  Below the operation gate 9017, a special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 that forms a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 9021 in an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the big winning opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 9022 for forming a special winning port 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second start winning port 9014. As shown in FIG. 19, a special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is disposed on the left side, and a variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. Although details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and are formed as plate-like bottom surfaces that are formed as the bottom surfaces of the channels through which the game balls flow down. By moving the member back and forth in the front-rear direction, an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win a special winning port 9024 or a second start winning port 9014 located below the bottom member and a game ball wins It is changed to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 has the bottom member moved forward in the small hit gaming state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. From the closed state, the bottom member is moved backward to move backward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening 9024 that becomes the winning area. In addition, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, An opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening 9014 that becomes a winning area.

  In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 19, the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is slightly larger than the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged adjacent to each other, so that the game area 907 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls onto the variable winning ball device 9015. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second start winning port 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is moved backward to open the special winning opening 9024, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 and falls to the out opening 9026 as it is.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 has a special variable winning. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is provided on the downstream side, because the game ball flows toward the ball device 9022. It can be said that it is provided.

  In the special winning opening 9024, a switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 23) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special winning opening 9024 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when a game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 that is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the gaming ball wins a prize winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) through other prize winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is in the closed state, the game balls cannot pass through (enter) the special winning opening 9024, and thus a prize ball cannot be obtained. It becomes disadvantageous for the person.

  Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second start opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a game ball won in the second start winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operation gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second start winning port 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special winning ball device). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state to be described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 (so-called right operation). Hitting operation). Therefore, in this embodiment, a detailed description is omitted. However, when the big hit game or the KT state is in effect, for example, the effect display device 909 displays “right-handed” or the like in the right direction. It is desirable to make a configuration so as to notify that it is during the right-handed operation period, for example, by performing an arrow display indicating “.”

  Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the normal symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. Further, the normal symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 9014). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 9032, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  A decorative lamp 9025 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 9027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 907. A top frame lamp 9028a, a left frame lamp 9028b, and a right frame lamp 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 907. In addition, a prize ball lamp 9051 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball cut lamp 9052 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 9028c. Is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 907. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hit ball operation handle 905, a game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends the game area 907. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends) The first start condition is satisfied), the first special symbol display 908a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first variable display unit 909a changes the first decorative symbol. Display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 9013. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the total number of reserved storage (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Increase by one.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, it is in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display) Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 908b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second variable display unit 909b. The variable display starts. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the total number of reserved memory (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit. Increase by one. However, even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the combined reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed in the symbol reserved memory display unit 9018c is increased by one.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins the big winning opening. One round in the big hit gaming state is from when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is released until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins a big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls are won in the big winning opening, or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, and 16 rounds). Note that a V winning area may be provided at the big winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on the condition that the hit ball has won the V winning area while the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is opened. Note that the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the types of big hits are 2R normal big hit, 2R positive big hit, 6R normal big hit, 6R positive big hit, and 16R positive big hit. For example, if 2R normal big hit or 2R positive big hit occurs, two round big hit games When a state is given and a 6R normal big hit or 6R probability variable big hit occurs, a six round big hit gaming state is given, and when a 16R probability big hit occurs, a 16 round big hit gaming state is given.

  When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of the first special symbol display 908a at the time when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, “7”, etc.) Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variation symbol and the probability transition state is entered, not only the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 908a becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

  When the second special symbol display unit 908b determines that the stop symbol at the time of the fluctuation stoppage of the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol such as “7”). Has a higher probability of being a big hit than a low probability state (a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / first KT state, which will be described later) have a higher probability of being a big hit. (State) is advantageous to the player. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol and shifts to a probable variation state, not only the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b becomes a jackpot symbol is increased, The probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a becomes a big hit symbol is also increased. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the second start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the first start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

  Further, when the second special symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game proceeds to the small hit gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain time has passed so that a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. Thereby, although it is less than a big hit game state also in a small hit game state, it is set as the open aspect which a player can obtain a ball.

  In the probability variation state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example, , The odd number of 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

  Here, the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in this embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) In some cases, the control is performed with high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  Of the KT states, the first KT state, as will be described later, is likely to cause a small hit, but the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 changes). In the KT state, the second KT state, as will be described later, has a short opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 9015, and when a small hit occurs, a game ball is placed in the downstream special variable winning ball device 9022. Easy to win.

  The probability variation state is a gaming state that tends to be a big hit than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is generated more than the low probability state. The gaming state is easy to play.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state per ordinary figure is the same as the normal state, but when the second special symbol changes, Since the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of variations in the fixed time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. In addition, since the second special symbol variation is configured to be a small hit in a part when it does not become a big hit, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Next, the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning is mainly generated at the first start winning opening 9013, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state. After that, when 100 variation display is finished without generating the big hit, the first KT state is ended and the normal state is changed. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the variable display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the low probability / the first KT state is controlled. Absent. For example, it is configured to provide a plurality of jackpot types that trigger the low probability / first KT state, and the number of variable displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game is different according to the jackpot type (for example, 20 times Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

  In this embodiment, when the player has moved to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 907. Aiming to launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated at the second starting winning opening 9014, and a variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / first KT state, and thereafter, after 100 variations display is finished without occurrence of a big hit, the first KT state ends and the normal state is entered. Also, for example, when a 2R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  However, as will be described later, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation big hit is made even though the state is the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, control is performed so as to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state. In other words, it is a case where a right hit is made due to the change display of the second special symbol in spite of being in the normal state, and a 16R probability variable big hit occurs. In such a case, the state shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If it is possible to obtain a prize ball of the KT state, the original game performance in the KT state is impaired. Therefore, even if the player hits the right side in the normal state without changing to the first KT state, the prize ball by the small hit game It is configured not to obtain much.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation big hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is set before the big hit starts. In the case of the non-KT state before the big hit starts, the first KT state is shifted to. In other words, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), it is configured to perform a left-handed operation, and is configured mainly assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. However, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is configured so that it is unconditionally shifted to the second KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, and there is a possibility that the original gaming property is impaired and gambling is unnecessarily increased. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variable big hit is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the transition to the second KT state is made only when the KT state is before the big hit, Such a situation is prevented, and in the non-KT state, the player is prompted to perform a left-handed operation. Note that when a right hand is made in the non-KT state, a left sound operation may be prompted by outputting a warning sound.

  Further, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are synchronized. Furthermore, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 908a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

  Furthermore, when the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 909a. When the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 909b.

  In the effect symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 908a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the effect symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the effect symbol display unit 909c. When the reach effect is performed, for example, the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed during variable display. Basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 908a, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed on the effect symbol display unit 909c (in the three display areas). The production design is finally stopped.) When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is an effect symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left Three production symbols with the middle right aligned). Hereinafter, such a design symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

  When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the effect symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the effect symbol display unit 909c.

  When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the effect symbol is terminated, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is delayed. When the special symbol for which the variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the effect symbol ends.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for the effect symbols that have not been stopped yet when the effect symbols that have stopped are part of the jackpot symbol among the three effect symbols. ) Is performed, and all or some of the effect symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the effect symbol display unit 909c. The display area in the middle is in a state where the variable display is still being performed, and the state in which all or part of the display area is synchronously displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, production The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 909c, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the effect symbol display unit 909c are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the effect design) is displayed, or the background of the effect design display unit 909c (a background color or pattern different from the design and the character) Etc.) may be changed (for example, color).

  Next, FIG. 20 to FIG. 22 are diagrams showing a special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 has been described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. However, the variable winning prize is only slightly smaller than the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a base plate portion 90101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is fixedly supported on the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. In a substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, a special winning opening 9024 (second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015) that opens toward the front is formed, and the special winning opening in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. A slit-like accommodation hole 90102 that is long in the left-right direction is formed at a position above the opening 9024 to accommodate the bottom surface member 9023 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 907 when the bottom surface member 9023 moves backward. Has been. In this embodiment, the special prize opening 9024 is specifically formed slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the base plate portion 90101, but may be left or right.

  The bottom surface member 9023 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is inclined downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom surface member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 9023 can be moved forward and backward in the forwardly moved state shown in FIG. 21 and the backwardly moved state shown in FIG. 22, and the bottom surface member 9023 is located on the back side (backward) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) for moving the vehicle forward and backward is disposed.

  Returning to FIGS. 20 to 22, on the front side of the base plate part 90101, a flow path forming base part 90112 that protrudes forward is formed, and on the upper part of this flow path forming base part 90112, it moves forward. An upstream flow path portion 90113 that is continuous in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 9023 with the upstream region 9023U that is the upper side end portion (right end portion) of the bottom surface member 9023 in the state, A downstream region 9023L which is a lower side end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 9023 and a downstream flow path portion 90114 which is continuous with the bottom surface member 9023 and forms a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 9023 are formed. Yes.

  Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base part 90112 is recessed downward from the end part on the bottom surface member 9023 side of the upstream flow path part 90113 and the downstream flow path part 90114, and the special winning opening 9024 is left and right in front view. A guide channel portion 90115 for guiding the game ball dropped below the bottom surface member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024 is formed so as to surround from below.

  The upstream-side channel portion 90113 and the downstream-side channel portion 90114 are formed so as to incline to the left so that the game ball can flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide channel portion 90115 extends downward toward the special prize opening 9024 side, and is recessed at a position in front of the special prize opening 9024. In the recessed space at the bottom of the guide channel portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 is provided for guiding the game ball backward toward the special prize opening 9024 side (the back side of the game area 907). ing.

  Furthermore, the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 90112 is integrally formed with a covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream flow path portion 90113, the downstream flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow channel portion 90115 from the front. Has been. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream flow passage portion 90113, the downstream flow passage portion 90114, and the guide flow passage portion 90115 from the front, so that the game balls flowing down these flow passage portions jump to the glass door frame 902 side. It has a function to prevent it. In this embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but may be fixed separately.

  In the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, a flow of game balls connected in the left-right direction, including the upstream channel portion 90113, the bottom surface member 9023, and the downstream channel portion 90114, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. A path F is formed. Here, in this embodiment, the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces 90118 that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

  In this embodiment, the restriction piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 90117. When there is no restriction piece 90118, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the longitudinal component by interfering with Than delay. These restricting pieces 90118 are formed so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom surface member 9023, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent ones. Yes. More specifically, in this embodiment, one restriction piece 90118 is formed in a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream-side passage portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream-side passage portion of the covering portion 90117. One restriction piece 90118 is formed at a portion covering 90114 from the front. In addition, a total of five regulating pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed at the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023. The number of such restriction pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in this embodiment, most of the restriction piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

  With the arrangement of the restricting pieces 90118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 21, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 (and the similarly configured variable winning ball apparatus 9015) of this embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P flows down so as to meander on the flow path F. When the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P becomes the special winning port 9024 (or the second start winning port 9014). Without passing the prize, it passes basically through the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 (or variable winning ball apparatus 9015). On the other hand, referring to FIG. 22, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P is guided to the flow path forming table portion 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a special winning opening 9024 (or the second start winning opening 9014).

  FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. FIG. 23 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. A game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 9056 and the RAM 9055, and the ROM 9054 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 9057 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

  Further, detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. An input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 and controls a solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020, a solenoid 90106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9022, and a solenoid 90206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015. An output circuit 9059 that is driven in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and is a system for resetting the game control microcomputer 90560 when the power is turned on. A main reset circuit (not shown) and an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer are also mounted on the main board 9031. Has been. Note that the main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The display control is performed on the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the effect symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the effect symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

  FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 9080 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including an effect control CPU 90201 and RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 9031 is allowed to pass through the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 24 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (the game control microcomputer 90560 side). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver substrate 9035 via the input / output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 90204.

  In the lamp driver substrate 9035, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 via the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a special winning award lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning award lamp 9024a.

  In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706, to the speaker 9027. The audio data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070 (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative symbols and effect symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP 90209 performs display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 90209 that performs display control of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90209 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 90200, and maps the VRAM to the address space. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. The VDP 90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

  In this embodiment, an effect control board 9080, an audio output board 9070, and a lamp driver board 9035 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second circuit on which other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with this production control board. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but other boards (for example, the audio output board 9070 shown in FIG. It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 in the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 for controlling the effect display device 909 as it is or as a simplified command, for example. May be. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, The command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). Then, initialization of the internal device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are internal devices (internal peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S904). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is the interrupt address. This mode indicates

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  If it is confirmed that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (such as a special symbol process flag), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. Control is performed so that a recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery is transmitted (step S9094). Then, control goes to a step S9015.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). The entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

  By the processes in steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, an out of ball flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in the flag for this.

  The CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board to the sub board according to the contents. Processing is executed (step S9014). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

  In step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Setting is performed (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination is one round (a random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on state has been entered) is executed (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. Then, the state is determined (switch process: step S9021).

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs display control processing for performing display control of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b. It executes (step S9022). For the first special symbol display device 908a and the second special symbol display device 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display device is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 ': Determines whether or not to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit and small hit determination)
(2) Random 2 ': Determines the type of jackpot, ie, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining jackpot type)
(3) Random 5 ′: Determines the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6 ': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 7 ′: The initial value of random 1 ′ is determined (for determining the random 1 ′ initial value).
(6) Random 8 ′: The initial value of random 6 ′ is determined (for determining the random 6 ′ initial value).
In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 26, the game control microcomputer 90560 performs (1) big hit, small hit determination random number, (2) big hit type determination random number, and (4) normal symbol. A counter for generating a hit determination random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (6) are also used. In this embodiment, a common random number (random 2 ′) is provided as a random number for determining the type of jackpot and a random number for determining the type of jackpot. However, different random numbers are provided. There may be.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 908a and the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process, the second special symbol display unit 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are controlled according to a second special symbol process flag for controlling the game in a predetermined order. Perform the appropriate processing. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs normal symbol process processing (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a hold storage process (step S9027a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total pending stored number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S9028).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 according to the winning detection based on one of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. The payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 provides the output port with information regarding on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. In addition, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b. Execute.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 908a and the second special symbol display unit 908b perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the CPU 9056 Control is performed so that a big hit does not occur simultaneously in the two displays.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 ′ is set. The jackpot determination table includes a non-probability change-time jackpot determination table used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability). Probability / second KT state)) is used in the probability change jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 28 is set in the non-probable change big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column in FIG. 28 is set in the probability changing big hit determination table. . The numerical value described in FIG. 28A is a jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1 ′). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to win a jackpot for the special symbol. Note that “probability” shown in FIG. 28A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with random 1 ′ is set. In the small hit determination table, no determination value is set for the first special symbol, and a small hit determination value is set only for the second special symbol.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number for random determination (random 1 ′). If it matches any one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 28B indicates the probability (ratio) of being a small hit. In addition, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but whether to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 908b to be a small hit symbol? It also means deciding whether or not.

  In this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, all are unconditionally set off. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the big hit is determined by the small hit determination table of FIG.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on a random number (random 2 ′) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “2R normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “2R probability variable big hit”, “6R normal big hit”, “6R probability variable big hit”, or “16R probability big hit”.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 20%, and “ “6R probability variable big hit” is determined, and “6R normal big hit” is determined with a probability of 35%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 29B, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, “16R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30% The “6R probability variation big hit” is determined, the “2R probability variation big hit” is determined with a probability of 5%, and the “2R normal big hit” is determined with a probability of 35%.

  The “16R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to the 16-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability variation state. And the second KT state is also transferred). The probability variation state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

  However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the big hit start, even if it becomes “16R probability variable big hit”, it is not in the second KT state. There is a case where a transition is made to the first KT state.

  The “6R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the jackpot is shifted to the probability varying state. And the first KT state is also transferred). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

  The “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the first KT state only after the jackpot gaming state is ended. Then, after the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is finished. Note that the first KT state is also ended when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the positive changed big state is entered. And the first KT state is also transferred). The probability variation state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

  The “2R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and is shifted to the first KT state only after the jackpot gaming state is ended. Then, after the transition to the first KT state, when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state is finished. Note that the first KT state is also ended when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times.

  Note that the types of jackpot types are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it may be configured to be able to determine 3R probability variation big hit to 7R probability variation big hit in addition to 16R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, and 2R normal big hit. It is done.

  FIG. 30 to FIG. 32 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this embodiment. EXT shown in FIGS. 30 to 32 is second byte data of an effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 25 types of #A to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or A to 18) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

  When the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 30A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 30B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

  When performing the variation display of the second special symbol, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 31C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #A to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of place, the second variation pattern #A is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. In the case of determining the small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of time of 5 minutes.

  In this embodiment, even when in the non-KT state, when the second special symbol variation display is executed and a small hit is made, there is a situation where a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls to the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the variation display execution frequency is lowered. By doing so, the occurrence frequency of the small hit is reduced, and the situation where the winning of the winning ball by the small hit is aimed at despite the non-KT state is prevented.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent an act of unjustly aiming for a winning ball by winning a special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of small hit, so it is configured to have a shorter variation time than the case of big hit. Yes.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 31D, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #B to # 04. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 31D, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds. Pattern # 03 (a variation pattern for preparing to open the second start winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as already described, in the case of being controlled to the first KT state, the special winning prize is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 although the frequency of small hits is increased. The special prize opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls have accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win a special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, at the first change of the first KT state, by securing a change time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 before the shift to the first KT state. By allowing the special variable winning ball device 9022 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, This prevents a situation in which more than expected prize balls can be obtained in the first KT state.

  Further, if the change display of the 2nd to 99th change is executed after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. 31 (E). The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the second to 99th variation shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 31E, when the second special symbol variation display is executed as the second to 99th variation in the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #C to # 07 To be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31E, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortening fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds. May be determined. In this embodiment, if the small hit is determined as the second to 99th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 07, the effect display device 909 is displayed. In the variation display of the effect symbols in, the effect of squeezing the symbols such as reaching or executing the slip effect is executed.

  In addition, after displaying the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 100th change (that is, the low probability / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 31 (F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 31 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #D to # 09. Is done.

  In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the effect display device 909 displays a character display such as “During Chance Time”. As shown in FIG. 31 (F), when it is determined that a small hit is made as the 100th change in the low probability / first KT state, an end display for displaying characters such as “End of Chance Time!” On the effect display device 909 is performed. Is determined to be the second variation pattern # 08. Also, as shown in FIG. 31F, when the big hit is determined as the 100th change in the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 ends the display of characters such as “End of Chance Time !!” After the display, the second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined restoration display is determined.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when the first special symbol variation display becomes a big hit during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 with a variation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You can no longer receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (in this example, 1 minute) that can generate a small hit several times is secured.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the high probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the change display of the first change is executed, the second special symbol change pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first change shown in FIG. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 32 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #E to # 12. Is done.

  Similarly to the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 32G, the second start winning prize is also obtained when the small probability is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. There are cases where the variation pattern for preparing the mouth opening (second variation pattern # 10) is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (G), in the case of determining a big hit as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. Second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (G), the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state.

  Further, in the case of executing the change display after the second change after the big hit game based on the 6R probability change big hit or the 2R probability change big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability to be shown / first KT and the second and subsequent variations is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 32 (H), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed after the second change of the high probability / the first KT state, it is set to one of the second change patterns #F to # 15. It is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (H), in the same way as the 2nd to 99th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 13 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (H), in the case of determining a big hit as the second and subsequent changes in the high probability / first KT state, it is suggested to indicate whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends. A second variation pattern # 15 including a battle effect is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (H), the second variation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined after the second variation in the high probability / first KT state. .

  In the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 32 (I) is selected. Variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 32 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns #G to # 18.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening variation in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). There is a case where the second variation pattern # 16 of a shortened variation having a variation time of 1.5 seconds shorter than that when the variation display is executed is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (I), in the case of determining the small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuous effect suggesting whether the high probability / second KT state continues. The pattern # 17 may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32 (I), in the case of determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability variation state (high probability state) ends after the continuous performance. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the variation pattern including the continuation effect and the battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuation effect and the battle effect in the variation display of the effect symbol. In the case of a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the effect of the victory mode is executed in the battle production, and in the case of a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) When the effect of defeat is executed, and when it is a small hit, the effect of draw is executed in the battle effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and, for example, a defeat mode effect may be executed in the battle effect even when the number of rounds in the big hit game is small 2R probability variation big hit. .

  In addition, when determining the variation pattern of the shortening variation of the second variation patterns # 05, # 13, and # 16, for example, the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined at a different rate depending on the number of reserved storage. Also good. For example, the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined at a higher rate as the number of reserved memories increases, so that the reserved memory can be quickly consumed and the operation rate can be increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the configuration is such that a shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the first KT state and a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a short variation of 5 seconds may be executed in the low probability state, and a shorter short variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 33 (1) shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 33 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special winning ball device 9015 in the second KT state. An opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is shown.

  First, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 33 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 9010. Is determined to be displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010 when it is determined to be off. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (1), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second startup winning port opening processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. Then, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 33A, the open time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short. Opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Accordingly, in the first KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 33 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened because of the fluctuation of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds have elapsed, which is a total of time 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and second start winning opening opening pretreatment time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 33 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the normal symbol is displayed. Is determined to be displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010 when it is determined to be off. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol fixed time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (2), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds elapses, the second start winning opening releasing time 2.6 seconds elapses. Then, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 9014.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the second special symbol variation display is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the small winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 33 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as extremely short as 0.5 seconds. In this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + design fixed time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 33 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 1515 is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022, and it is easy to win a game ball to the special winning opening 9024.

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol process processing is executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) to execute the normal symbol variation display or to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015. (See step S9026C). The game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit the normal figure in the normal symbol process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) To determine whether or not to hit the ordinary map. Specifically, regardless of whether the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a big hit gaming state , It is determined whether or not to make a normal map with the same probability.

  In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same in 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening releasing process is The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is made different by shortening to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. I can't. For example, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods) by varying the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be varied. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the methods described above, it is possible to suppress winning to the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

  Further, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. The ball device 9015 is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, a second opening pattern (that opens the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 33 (2) for a short time ( You may comprise so that it may control by short open.

  Even in the first KT state, when the last change display in the low probability / first KT state is executed, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity that the variable winning ball device 9015 is long open when the left-handed notification is made after the low probability / first KT state ends.

  In addition, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is configured to have a high probability of opening in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible not to win the variable winning ball device 9015, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  FIGS. 34 and 35 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 34, commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H), 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) correspond to the first variable display portion 909a or the second variable display portion corresponding to the variable symbol special display. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Accordingly, when the production control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b is received. Control to start the variable display of the decorative pattern at.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first variation pattern command. Since the command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second decorative symbol, Although the display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal variation big hit / 2R positive variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / loss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the production control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing stop of variable display of the first symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second ornament symbol stop designation command)) for instructing to stop the variable display of the second symbol.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  Command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. In this embodiment, a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning specified command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

  Command D000 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / second KT state.

  The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display portion 909a and the second variable display portion 909b and the display state of the effect symbol display portion 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the sound output board 9070. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the big hit game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

  When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process, the first start port switch 9013a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning port 9013 provided in the game board 906 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 9013 has occurred (step S90311), the first start opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). Thereafter, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes in steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.
First special symbol normal process (step S90300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. The internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  First special symbol changing process (step S90303): This processing is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process has elapsed (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the production control microcomputer 90200 has Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decoration symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  First special symbol stop process (step S90304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first big hit flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the first big hit flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control processing is displayed as the special symbol display. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S9022.

  First big winning opening opening pre-process (step S90305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the first grand prize opening, control for opening the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round. However, when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process of starting a big hit game.

  First big prize opening opening process (step S90306): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 9023a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

  First big hit end processing (step S90307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause display control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

  When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process, the second start port switch 9014a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 9014 provided in the game board 906 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the second start winning opening 9014 has occurred (step S90321), the second start opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). It should be noted that the second start port switch passing process will be described by replacing “first” in the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 37 with “second”. Thereafter, the CPU 9056 performs any one of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes in steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.
Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. On the other hand, if not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). Note that the second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

  Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90352.

  Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90353.

  Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the second variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 has Control to transmit the symbol confirmation designation command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90354. The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decoration symbol when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90355. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90358. When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced off), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing in step S9022 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Pre-opening process for second big prize opening (step S90355): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second big prize opening opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls entered in the special variable winning ball device 9020) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Also, the execution time of the second big prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Second big winning opening opening process (step S90356): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball is won at the big winning opening and the first counting switch 9023a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a big winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

  Second big hit end process (step S90357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause display control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, processing for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90350.

  Second small hit release pre-processing (step S90358): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hitting pre-processing, the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) is initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 to be opened. Also, the execution time of the second small hit release process is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90359. The pre-opening process for the second small hit is also a process for starting the small hit game.

  Second small hit releasing process (step S90359): This process is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming that the closing condition of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is satisfied is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 of 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 33) elapses. In addition, when a game ball wins a special winning opening and the second count switch 9025a detects the gaming ball, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90360 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Second small hit end processing (step S90360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause display control microcomputer 90200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like (step S90701A). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S90702A). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. . Further, the second decorative symbol process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. . Further, effect symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the effect symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90707). In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a notice determination random number is executed (step S90708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S90702A.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S90706) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the process of S90700, and then performs one of S90800 to S90810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Pre-reading process (S90700): This is a process for storing the reserved storage information (holding information) corresponding to the reserved storage information of the game control microcomputer 90560 and making the reserved storage information usable for the pre-reading effect. The pre-reading effect refers to the contents of the special symbol variable display based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold memory information before the turn of the special symbol change display (symbol change) based on the hold information is reached. This is a production technique such as making a prior notice in advance of how the special symbols will change in the future. For example, when the stored storage information indicates that it is a small hit or a big hit, a notice effect (refer to FIG. 40) called a hold continuous notification effect can be executed as a prefetch effect. Hereinafter, the hold storage information that is the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target hold storage information”. After the prefetching process, the big hit related process (S90701) and the rush process (S90702) are executed, which will be described in detail later.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (S90801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S90801): Control is performed so that a variation effect that is an effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is started. In response to the received variation pattern command, a variation production effect pattern is selected, and the production time timer that measures the production time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the changing time effect processing (S90802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S90802): Controls the switching timing of each state constituting the production pattern and monitors whether or not the production time counted by the production time timer has ended. Then, based on the fact that the production time has ended or that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the value of the production control process flag corresponds to the production-time production stop process (S90803) in order to terminate the production at the time of fluctuation. Update to value.

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S90803): Control is performed to stop the effect at the time of variation and display the effect result corresponding to the variation display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S90804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (S90800).

  Big hit display process (S90804): When a big hit occurs, display control such as a fanfare effect as an effect such as a big hit display for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of the big win is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S90805).

  In-round processing (S90805): Display control during the big hit round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S90807).

  Post-round processing (S90806): Display control between big hit rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S90805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S90807): In the effect display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800).

  Small hit display process (S90808): When a small hit occurs, display control such as a fanfare effect as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a small hit is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S90809).

  Small hit opening process (S90809): Various small effects are controlled while the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 is open. For example, in the small hit game state, various effects are executed when a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a in the special winning opening 9024a. When the special variable winning ball device 9022 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S90810).

  Small hit end effect process (S90810): The effect display device 909 performs effect control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800).

  In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled by each of the above-described processes, the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the effect result corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. The effect control CPU 90201 recognizes the specified change pattern and the display result for the change display to be executed based on the received change pattern command and the display result designation command, for example. Determine the result.

[Directing during a big hit]
Next, the effect during the big hit executed in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the jackpot display result is derived, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Various effects are executed during the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit state or the big hit state).

[On-hold rendition]
For example, there is a holding continuous production as a big hit production. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a random value for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type when a game ball enters a start winning area such as the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. , And a random value for determining a variation pattern is extracted. Then, if the start condition that can start the variable display such as the condition that the variable display is not being executed or the condition that the jackpot is not being hit is satisfied at the time of starting winning, the variable display is executed based on the extracted random number value.

  On the other hand, information indicating the extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 9055 at the time of starting winning for the variable display in which the starting condition is not yet established even though the game ball has entered the starting winning area. Then, at the time of the start winning prize, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 90200 a prefetch result notification command that can specify information indicating whether or not to make a big hit, information indicating a variation pattern, and the like. . The hold memory is read out from the old one each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and the variable display is executed based on the read information of the hold memory.

  By receiving such a prefetching result notification command, the production control microcomputer 90200 becomes a jackpot or a specific variation pattern type until a variation display that becomes a big variation or a specific variation pattern type is executed. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect that suggests whether or not to notify.

  Such a pre-reading effect may be executed from the time of the previous big hit state to the time when the fluctuation display becomes the next big hit state. In this embodiment, the prefetch effect that is executed in the previous big hit state is referred to as a reserved continuous effect. When there is a hold memory that is determined to be the big hit state next in the big hit state (so-called hold continuous case), the hold continuous effect of the success pattern is executed until the next big hit state. In addition, there is a case where a failure continuous holding effect is executed. Then, in a succession of renditions of a success pattern, a premium video that cannot be seen with a normal jackpot flows thereafter.

  In addition, there is a case where a hold memory that is in a small hit state is stored between a big hit state and a hold memory that has been determined to be the next big hit state. A case where there is such a hold continuous effect or a hold memory that is controlled to a small hit state during the hold continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 40 is an effect drawing showing effects performed during the big hit. The big hit effect is performed in the order of FIGS. FIG. 40A shows a screen of the effect display device 909 at the start of the big hit. When the gaming state is switched to the big hit state and the first round game is started, the image is switched to the video with the big hit. An image indicating the current number of rounds is displayed at the upper right of the screen of the effect display device 909, and a numerical symbol indicating at which effect symbol the big hit has been started is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In the upper left corner of the screen, a total winning image 90194 shows the winning balls acquired by winning a big hit. As shown in FIG. 40A, at the start of the big hit, a total acquired image 90194 of “0GET” indicating that the number of acquisition is 0 is displayed.

  When the round progresses from the state of FIG. 40 (a) and becomes 5R, the effect of the reservation is executed. When the reservation continuous effect is successful, a reservation continuous image 90195 made up of the characters “continuity change” indicating the reservation continuous effect as shown in FIG. 40B is displayed. Also, the big hit video is switched from the normal big hit video to a premium video that can be seen only during the reservation. At this time, a “450 GET” total acquired image 90194 indicating that the acquired number is 450 is displayed. Thereafter, the screen of FIG. 40C is displayed at the 16th round, which is the first big hit end round. As shown in FIG. 40C, a premium video flows and a “1550 GET” total acquired image 90194 indicating that the acquired number is 1550 is displayed.

  When information on the small hit is stored in the hold storage between the first big hit and the second big hit, a screen as shown in FIG. 40 (d) is displayed. In FIG. 40D, “+100” indicates that 100 game balls have been obtained by winning a game ball in the special winning opening 9024 of the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022 in one small win. A first acquired image 90196 to be displayed is displayed. The first acquired image 90196 is displayed with a rainbow background in the center of the screen. Such an effect due to the small hit between the big hits is also referred to as an acquisition notification effect. In the lower right corner of the screen, a number “123”, which is a symbol indicating a small win, is displayed in a discrete manner. In the upper right corner of the screen, a character “17R” is displayed to indicate that one small win is counted as one round. In the upper left of the screen, a total acquired image 90194 of “1600 GET” indicating the total number of acquired game balls acquired with the first jackpot is displayed. In FIG. 40 (d), a series of premium videos continues from FIG. 40 (c).

  Next, a state when the second big hit starts after the end of the small hit state will be described with reference to FIG. At the beginning of the second jackpot, “18R” is added to the top right corner of the screen, counting the number of rounds and the first jackpot as one round, and then starting the next big jackpot round. Characters are displayed. Also, a symbol “7” indicating the current jackpot symbol is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In addition, a total acquired image 90194 of “1750 GET” indicating the total number of acquired game balls is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Also at this time, a series of premium video is continuously played.

  At the end of the second jackpot, the screen is as shown in FIG. In the upper right corner of the screen, after the first jackpot round and the small jackpot are counted as one round, the characters “33R” are displayed, which is the total of the next jackpot round. Also, a symbol “7” indicating the current jackpot symbol is displayed at the lower right of the screen. Also, a total acquired image 90194 of “3200 GET” indicating the total number of acquired game balls is displayed on the upper left of the screen. Also at this time, a series of premium video is continuously played.

  As shown in FIG. 40, a premium video with a hold effect flows as a series of videos from the big hit state to the next big hit state. Such a premier video also flows when the small hit state is controlled during a specific period from the big hit state to the start of the next big hit state. In this way, since the presentation by the video is a series, it is possible to give the impression that the big hit continues even if the gaming state changes. Therefore, in the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, when there is a pending storage that is determined to be controlled to a small hit state different from the big hit state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, after the first big hit, the deviation may be included until the next big hit, but even in this case, the premium video continues to flow.

[Direction during rush]
Next, the production during the rush will be described. In this embodiment, if the high probability / first KT state or the high probability / second KT state is reached after the big hit gaming state, the rush state is entered. In the rush state, in the high probability / first KT state, it is not possible to expect a ball to be obtained by a small hit. On the other hand, in the rush state of high probability / second KT state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a prize ball based on the winning of a game ball in the special winning opening 9024 is added as needed. Therefore, during the rush state of the probability / second KT state, it is a gaming state where the number of balls is likely to increase as compared to other gaming states.

  FIG. 41 is an effect drawing showing effects executed during rush. When the rush state is entered after the big hit gaming state is finished, a rushing screen as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the center of the screen of the effect display device 909, a downward arrow indicates that the current variation display is being executed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 9091, 9092, and 9093. Indicated by. In the upper right corner of the screen, a total acquired image 90194 indicating the total number of acquired balls that have been won by big hits and balls in rush is displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, characters “RUSH” indicating that the rush state is currently being displayed. In the lower left of the screen, a hold display H for displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of the hold storage information.

  When the current fluctuation is a fluctuation that results in a small hit display result from the state of FIG. 41A, as shown in FIG. 41B, the display result is controlled to the small hit state. A combination of even-numbered symbols “222” is displayed. In addition, the white even-numbered pattern of FIG.41 (b) is blue. In the lower right corner of the screen, the winning ball acquired during the small hit is displayed as a second acquired image 90197 of the characters “+100”.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the small hit state is achieved in the rush state, a second acquired image 90197 for notifying that the game ball has been won is displayed on the special variable winning ball device 9022. In this way, since it is clearly notified that the game ball has been acquired, it is easy to understand that the small hit state has been controlled, and it is possible to add momentum to the performance. Therefore, interest when controlled to the small hit state can be improved.

  Also, from the state of FIG. 41 (a), when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation that results in a small hit display result, and there is a hold memory that is controlled to the small hit state in the hold memory, FIG. The display screen is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 41 (c), a combination of even symbols “222” indicating that the small hit state is controlled is displayed as a display result. Up to this point, the process is the same as FIG. However, in the lower right corner of the screen, the winning ball acquired during the small hit is displayed as a third acquired image 90198 of the characters “GET”.

  As shown in FIGS. 41B and 41C, in the small hit state, the second acquired image 90197 in the case where there is no hold storage determined to be controlled in the small hit state in the hold, and in the hold The third acquired image 90198 in the case where there is a pending storage determined to be controlled to the small hit state is displayed in a different manner. In this way, it is possible to give a special feeling to the player when there is a holding memory determined to be controlled to the small hit state (when holding information is stored). Therefore, expectation can be given to the future gaming state.

  As shown in FIGS. 40D, 41B, and 41C, the first acquired image 90196 when it is controlled to the small hit state during the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, The acquired images are displayed in different display modes in the second acquired image 90197 and the third acquired image 90198 in periods other than the above. In this way, the first acquired image 90196 in the small hit state during the reserved continuous production that can acquire the most gaming balls among these states is larger in the center of the screen than the acquired images in other states, Also displayed in rainbow colors. Thereby, a special feeling can be given when it is controlled to the small hit state between the big hits.

  Next, when the probability variation big hit is obtained from the state of FIG. 41A (high probability / first KT state or high probability / second KT state), the screen shown in FIG. 41D is displayed. As shown in FIG. 41 (d), a combination of odd symbols “777” indicating that the display result is controlled to the probable big hit state is displayed. Note that the odd-numbered symbols in FIG. 41 (d) are red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (e), the probability variation jackpot is started, and an image corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is played. Note that the probability variation big hit symbol may be different between the high probability / first KT state in which a small hitting cannot be achieved and the high probability / second KT state in which a small hit can be expected. For example, when the high probability / first KT state is set, an odd symbol “333” is displayed, and when the high probability / second KT state is set, a special feeling can be obtained by displaying “777”. Also, the color of the numbers may be different for the “3” symbol and the “7” symbol.

  When the normal big hit is obtained from the state of FIG. 41 (a) (low probability / first KT state), as shown in FIG. 41 (f), the symbol “END” indicating the end of the rush state is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (g), the normal big hit is started and an image corresponding to the normal big hit is played. In addition, after the end of the normal big hit, when the low probability / first KT state change is repeated 100 times, the non-KT state is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the display result includes a small hit display result composed of a combination of blue symbols shown in FIG. 41 (b) and a probability variation big hit composed of a combination of red symbols shown in FIG. 41 (d). Display results. When the small hit display result is derived and displayed, the small hit state is controlled. When the probability variation big hit display result is derived and displayed, the big hit state is controlled. In this way, by changing the display result depending on whether it is a small hit display result or a big hit display result, the gaming state to be controlled can be easily shown.

  Further, when the small hit state is controlled during a rush state where a series of premium images are not flowing, a small hit display result composed of a combination of blue symbols shown in FIG. 41 (b) is derived and displayed. When the small hit state is controlled during the rush state after the series of premium images shown in d) has flowed, control is performed so that the loose eye is displayed at the lower right of the screen. In this way, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the target of the premium video is controlled to the small hit state, and the interest of the game is reduced.

  In FIG. 41 (g), a challenge effect in which the rush state continues in the middle of the video corresponding to the normal jackpot may be executed. The challenge effect is an effect that shows that it was a promising big hit in which the rush state continues in the appearance of a normal big hit. Specifically, after issuing the “END” symbol indicating the end of the rush state, the push button is pushed, and if the wall on the screen is opened by the push button operation, the rush state continues with a successful challenge. Even if the push button is operated, if the wall on the screen does not open, the challenge will fail and the end of the rush state will be confirmed.

[Big hit related processing]
Next, the jackpot related process executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the big hit related processing. The jackpot related process is executed in the effect control process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the big hit related process, the effect control CPU 90201 executes a process related to the effect setting as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

  In the big hit related process, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is a big hit start time (S90500). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is the start of the big hit (Y in S90500), the inside of the reserved storage buffer is confirmed (S90501), and the process proceeds to S90502. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is not the start of the big hit (N in S90500), the process ends.

  In S90502, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot holding storage. When it is determined that there is a big hit hold memory (Y in S90502), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect, and sets the success pattern when executing the hold continuous effect ( S90503) and S90504 are entered.

  In step S90504, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a small hit holding memory until the next big hit. If the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that there is a small-bonus storage until the next big hit (Y in S90504), it sets the symbol and the acquisition notification effect at the time of the big hit small hit (S90505), It is set to play the big hit video (S90506). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90507) and ends the process.

  In step S90504, if the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is no small hit hold storage until the next big hit (N in S90504), the processing is set so as to play a series of big hit videos without performing the processing of S90505. (S90506). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90507) and ends the process. Here, in S90506, when there is a small hit between the big hits, in addition to the premium video as shown in FIG.

  In S90502, if it is determined that there is no big hit hold memory (N in S90502), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect. The setting is made (S90508). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets so that the normal big hit video that is not a premium video ends when the big hit ends (S90509). Then, other effects are set (S90507), and the process ends.

  Instead of providing a success pattern and a failure pattern as the reserved continuous effects, the reserved continuous effects may be executed only in the case where there is a big hit reserved memory in S90502. In addition, the reserved rendition may be one in which a premium video flows from the start of the big hit, and it is not necessary to execute success or failure effects in the middle of the round.

  Moreover, in S90505, when setting the symbol and the acquisition notification effect at the time of the big hit, the flag for executing the acquisition notification effect may be set up. Then, the presence / absence effect may be executed by confirming the presence or absence of the flag at the start of the small hit fluctuation.

[Process during rush]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the rush process. The rush process is executed in the effect control process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the rush process, the big hit symbol and the acquisition notification effect are determined in accordance with the result of the variable display to be executed when the rush time. Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

  In the rush process, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in rush (S90520). If the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that the current gaming state is rushing (Y in S90520), the process proceeds to S90521. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in rush (N in S90520), the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90525) and ends the process.

  In S90521, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. When it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a big hit (N in S90521), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current fluctuation is a small hit (S90522). The process proceeds to S90522 (Y) and S90523. In S90522, if the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that the current fluctuation is not a small hit (N in S90522), it sets other effects (S90525) and ends the process. In S90523, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a small hit hold memory in the hold memory (S90523). If the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is a small hit hold memory in the hold memory (Y in S90523), it sets an acquisition notification effect when there is a small hit hold (S90529), and other effects. Is set (S90525), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no small hit hold storage in the hold storage (N in S90523), the effect control CPU 90201 sets an acquisition notification effect when there is no small hit hold (S90524), and other effects. Is set (S90525), and the process ends.

  In S90521, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is a big hit (Y in S90521), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is a probable big hit (S90526). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is a probable big hit (Y in S90526), it sets a symbol for the probable big hit (S90527), sets other effects (S90525), and ends the process. On the other hand, if the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that it is not a probable big hit (N in S90526), it sets a symbol for a normal big hit (S90528), sets other effects (S90525), and ends the process. The effect at the time of rush as shown in FIG. 41 is determined by the effect content set in the process at the time of rush.

[Modified example of production during the big hit]
FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing processing during a big hit in the modified example. In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are disposed side by side has been described. However, the above-described various processes may be executed by one variable winning ball apparatus 9015 without providing the special variable winning ball apparatus 9022.

  For example, when a so-called attacker which is one variable winning ball device 9015 is used, such an attacker repeatedly opens and closes from 1R to 16R in the first big hit section. Then, after the fluctuation section after the end of the big hit is completed, it is controlled to the small hit state, so that the attacker shifts to the small hit section in which the short opening and closing is repeated five times. The small hit section is indicated as 17R on the screen of the effect display device 909. Then, after the fluctuation section after the end of the small hitting section is completed, the attacker repeatedly controls opening and closing from 1R to 16R in the second big hit section by being controlled to the big hitting state again. The second big hit section is displayed as 18R to 33R on the screen of the effect display device 909. A series of big hit images are played from the first big hit section to the end of the second big hit section including the small hit section. Note that, as shown in FIG. 40, the big hit video may be a premium video that is triggered by the on-hold continuous effect, or a premium video may be started from the start of the first big hit.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, processing during a big hit effect in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, a case where music can be selected during a big hit will be described. In the second embodiment, during the big hit, a selection effect is performed in which any one of a plurality of songs is selected based on the player's operation. In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a stick controller and a push button as operation means (not shown). For example, the stick controller may be attached to a predetermined position of the member forming the surplus ball receiving tray 904, and the push button may be attached to the upper surface of the member forming the hitting ball supply tray 903 or the like. When these operating means are operated, the player's operation is detected by a sensor provided inside, and the detection signal is transmitted to the effect control board 9080, and an effect based on the operation is executed. In addition, as a selection effect, any video may be selected from a plurality of types of video during a big hit, or any mode may be selected from a plurality of types of modes.

  FIG. 45 is an effect drawing showing effects performed during the big hit. With reference to FIG. 45, the effect during the big hit will be described. As shown in FIG. 45 (a), at the start of the big hit, a music selection screen is displayed. The music selection screen at the start of the big hit is displayed regardless of the player's operation. In the area on the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 909, items corresponding to the music pieces A to D are displayed. A first selection image 90170 corresponding to the A song, a second selection image 90171 corresponding to the B song, a third selection image 90172 corresponding to the C song, and a fourth selection image 90173 corresponding to the D song from above. They are displayed in order. In addition, a bordered display indicates that an item corresponding to the image is selected around the first selection image 90170.

  A video region 90175 is displayed on the right side of the first selection image 90170 to the fourth selection image 90173. In the video area 90175, videos corresponding to the music pieces A to D flow. At the start of the big hit, with the first selection image 90170 selected, the video corresponding to the music A flows from the specific part (for example, the rust portion where the music is heard) in the video area 90175. Also, at the start of the big hit, the music corresponding to the music A selected first is played from the specific part (rust portion). Here, the specific portion may be a portion other than the rust portion that is the story of the music. For example, it may be a main part of a music piece that is a rising part of the music but is different from the chorus part. Note that the video and sound corresponding to the music may be played from the beginning of the music.

  In addition, a selection operation image 90176 for prompting a music selection operation simulating a stick controller is displayed on the left side of the lower portion of the screen of the effect display device 909. In addition, a determination image 90177 that prompts a music determination operation imitating a push button is displayed at the bottom center of the screen. In addition, on the right side at the bottom of the screen, an image “7” is displayed that indicates which symbol is the current big hit. In addition, on the upper left side of the screen, the current round number is displayed, and on the upper right side of the screen, an image of a right-handed instruction that prompts the player to play the game on the right side is displayed.

  A state when the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 45A and an item corresponding to the music of B is selected will be described with reference to FIG. When the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 45A and an item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a state of being trimmed. In addition, the video corresponding to the music B flows from the specific portion (rust portion) in the video area 90175, and the music corresponding to the music B is played from the specific portion (rust portion).

  The case where the music piece A is determined from the state of FIG. 45B will be described with reference to FIG. In the music selection at the time of the jackpot start, when the music A is determined, the video corresponding to the music A is reproduced from the beginning in the video area 90175 moved to the center of the screen as the music determination screen at the time of the jackpot start. Music A is played from the beginning. The display of the selection operation image 90176 and the determination image 90177 is erased by the determination operation. Here, the music selection operation at the start of the big hit can be performed for a period from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. If the selection operation and the determination operation are not performed before the end of the second round, the video and sound corresponding to the initially set music A will flow from the end of the second round. Further, when two rounds are completed in a state where only the selection operation is performed and the determination operation is not performed, the video and sound of the music corresponding to the item selected by the selection operation are output.

  When the third round starts from the state of FIG. 45 (c), as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the video corresponding to the music A is continuously played in the video area 90175 at the center of the screen and the sound corresponding to the music A is output. Is done. At the start of the third round, the selection operation image 90176 is displayed again at the bottom of the screen. Then, when the player operates the stick controller, the music selection screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. Thus, the second music selection screen is displayed based on the player's operation. In the first music selection screen, the operation valid period is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and in the second music selection screen, the operation valid period is the last from the start of the third round. It is set up to round (16 rounds). These periods may be set in any way, the selectable period may be three or more times, and may be set so that the selection operation cannot be performed during any round.

  In the music selection screen in FIG. 45 (e), a music whose character in the first selection image 90170 corresponding to the item of music A is “A” is compared with the music selection screen at the start of jackpot in FIG. 45 (a). The character shown has been changed to a “return” character. Further, the currently selected “returned” first selected image 90170 is displayed with a border. Also, from the state of FIG. 45 (d), the video and sound corresponding to the music piece A continue to flow as they are. In addition, a determination image 90177 is newly displayed. From this state, when the stick controller is operated and an item corresponding to the song B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a framed state as shown in FIG. Also, a video corresponding to the music B flows from the rust portion in the video area 90175. However, even when such a selection operation is performed, the sound of the music piece A is continuously output.

  When the music piece A is selected from the state shown in FIG. 45 (f), the state is as shown in FIG. 45 (g). In FIG. 45 (g), since the item of music A corresponding to the first selection image 90170 indicated by “Return” in FIG. 45 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to A is continuously reproduced in the video area 90175. . In addition, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. On the other hand, when the music B is selected from the state shown in FIG. 45 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 45 (h). In FIG. 45 (h), since the item of the music B corresponding to the second selection image 90171 indicated by “B” in FIG. 45 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to B is reproduced from the beginning in the video area 90175. . Also, the sound of the music B is reproduced from the beginning.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), at the start of the big hit, items corresponding to a plurality of types of music are displayed. And the player can change the item selected by selection operation, as shown in FIG.45 (b). In addition, the selection operation outputs music or video corresponding to the selected item. And as shown in FIG.45 (e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed as "Return". In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the sound of the music A is continuously played. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), when an item corresponding to a music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is reproduced from the beginning.

  In this way, it is possible to check what other selection items exist while playing the music corresponding to the music A. Even if the song A is decided again, the song A is not reproduced from the beginning and continues to flow from the middle. Therefore, even when the selected song is selected again, the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. More specifically, if the already selected music is selected again, it may be troublesome if the music is reproduced from the beginning, and the interest may be reduced. However, even if the selected music piece is selected again by the processing as described above, it is possible to prevent the music piece from being reproduced from the beginning, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 45, the selection effect which selects an item can be performed during a big hit state. Therefore, even when the selected music piece is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game during the big hit state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the music selection effect for selecting the music is a selection effect at the start of the round executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the big hit, and as shown in FIG. 45 (d). In addition, a selection effect that is executed based on the player's operation when three rounds are disclosed is included. In this way, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the big hit state, the music selection is not selected in the first selection effect but according to the preference of the player such as selecting the music in the second selection effect. Selection effects can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the first selection effect at the start of the round is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and the second selection effect at the start of the third round is at the start of the third round. To the final round. Therefore, by extending the period during which the second selection effect that is executed based on the player's operation can be performed, it is possible to deal with various types of players, such as the first selection operation not being possible.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 45, in the music that can be played back, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), in the selection effect at the start of the round, the items are based on the player's operation. When changed, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 45 (e) and 45 (f), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, even if the item is changed based on the player's operation, It does not change. In this way, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced by frequently switching the music.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45E, in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the item corresponding to the currently executed music is different from the display of “A” as the selection effect at the start of the round. Display with "Back". In this way, it is possible to easily show the player which music is currently being played.

  In addition, you may perform a reservation continuous effect about the above-mentioned selection effect. For example, it is assumed that a reserved continuous effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during a round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the hold continuous effect may be executed at a timing at which one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. If it does in this way, a player can be surprised in the first selection production which selects music at the time of a jackpot start, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, when there is no player determination operation until the end of the second round, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives the command at the end of the second round. . Further, in the second selection effect at the start of the third round, instead of the selection effect at the time of starting the big hit, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing operated by the player. If the player does not perform a selection operation from the selection effect at the start of the third round to the final round, the holding continuous effect may be executed at the timing after the period during which the selection effect can be executed. Good.

  Further, regarding the big hit state as the advantageous state, a normal big hit as the first advantageous state and a probabilistic big hit as the second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state may be provided. And you may perform the probability change promotion effect which is promoted to the probability change big hit during the normal big hit. For example, it is assumed that the probability variation promotion effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during the round. Then, as one timing among the plurality of timings, the probable promotion effect may be executed at a timing at which one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. If it does in this way, a player can be surprised in the selection production which selects music at the time of a big hit, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the case of the probable promotion effect, the execution timing may be determined at the start of the big hit. Then, the execution timing of the probable change promotion effect may have a plurality of timings at the time of selection of the music, the result of the incline effect of the fixed probabilistic promotion effect of 11R to 13R, and the end time (after the end of 16R). Good. If it is determined at the time of selection of music by a predetermined random number lottery from among these three patterns, the probable promotion effect may be executed in the selection effect of selecting music at the start of jackpot.

  Further, a plurality of big hits with different rounds may be provided, and this may be applied to a round promotion effect in which a big hit with a small number of rounds is promoted to a big hit with a large number of rounds.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the big hit music selection process. The big hit music selection process is executed in the effect control process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the big hit music selection process, when it is a big hit time, the process for the effect shown in FIG. 45 is executed. Hereinafter, specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

  In the big hit music selection process, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current round is a period of 1R to 2R (S90601). When it is determined that the current round is the period from 1R to 2R (Y in S90601), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether the initial music determination flag is set (S90602). When the initial music determination flag is set (Y in S90602), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90602, when the initial music determination flag is not set (N in S90602), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is a music change period (S90603) and determines that it is a music change period. In this case (Y in S90603), it is determined whether or not there is a selection operation (S90604). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90603), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90604, when it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90604), the effect control CPU 90201 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the music from the chorus in accordance with the music selection (S90605). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90604), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90606 after S90605, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation (S90606). When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90606), the effect control CPU 90201 plays the video and the music corresponding to the determined music from the beginning (S90607). Next, an initial music determination flag is set (S90608), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90606), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In step S90601, if it is determined that the current round is not in the period of 1R to 2R, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the final music determination flag is set (S90610). When the final music determination flag is set (Y in S90610), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final music determination flag is not set (N in S90610), the effect control CPU 90201 displays a music change screen (S90611). Next, it is determined whether a screen change flag is set (S90612).

  In S90612, when it is determined that the screen change flag is not set (N in S90612), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether there is a change operation (S90613). When it is determined that there is no change operation (N in S90613), the effect control CPU 90201 plays the video and music corresponding to the initial music as they are (S90616), and stores various data in the storage area (S90609). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a change operation (Y in S90613), the effect control CPU 90201 sets a screen flag (S90614) and displays a music selection screen in which the initial music is set to “return” (S90615). , The process proceeds to S90617. In S90612, if the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the screen change flag is set (Y in S90612), the process proceeds to S90617 without performing the processes from S90613 to S90615.

  In step S90617, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether it is a music change period. If the CPU 90201 for effect control determines that it is the music change period (Y in S90617), it determines whether there is a selection operation (S90618). In S90617, if it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. When it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90618), the effect control CPU 90201 plays the video corresponding to the selected music from the chorus and plays the initial music as it is (S90619). Then, the process proceeds to S90620. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90618), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

  In S90620, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation. When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90620), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the initial music is determined (S90621). In S90620, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90620), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. If the initial music is determined in S90621 (Y in S90621), the video corresponding to the initial music is played continuously and the initial music is played as it is (S90622). Next, a final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the effect control CPU 90201 is not determined as the initial music (N in S90621), the video corresponding to the changed music is played from the beginning and the changed music is played from the beginning (S90623). Next, a final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends.

[Modification of music selection control]
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a modification example of selection control of music to be reproduced during a game such as a big hit music will be described. In this modification, a music selection control process that enables selection of music to be played during a game according to a player's operation (action) when a predetermined menu screen is displayed will be described. The music selection control process is executed by the effect control CPU 90201.

[Menu screen structure]
The menu screen is, for example, various settings that can be selected by the player on the effect display device 909 at a specific timing such as a customer waiting demonstration display (abbreviation of customer waiting demonstration display) and the start of a big game state. It is a display screen which presents an item with an option form (menu form) image. The customer waiting demonstration display refers to displaying a predetermined image as a demonstration display other than the image displayed during the game on the effect display device 909 in a state where the game has not been executed for a predetermined period (customer waiting state). The menu screen includes a main menu screen and a sub menu screen. The main menu screen is a screen that displays an upper menu image that can display main setting items in a list format. The submenu screen is a screen that displays the detailed items of the setting items that have been selected and determined in response to selection or determination of any of the setting items displayed on the main menu screen.

  On the main menu screen in the menu screen, icon images (hereinafter referred to as icons) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting items are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. The plural types of setting items include music selection settings for setting music to be played during a game. On the main menu screen, as the icon image corresponding to the music selection setting, a music image that is an icon image that can specify information related to the music is displayed.

  On the main menu screen, a selectable display in which an icon corresponding to one selectable setting item among a plurality of types of setting items is highlighted (high luminance display) is displayed. When the stick controller that can be operated in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is tilted forward, the selectable icon is switched upward, and the stick controller is tilted backward. In response, the icon that can be selected is switched downward. When the push button is operated, the display screen is switched from the main menu screen to a submenu screen corresponding to a setting item corresponding to an icon that can be selected.

[Composition of music selection screen]
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a control example of music selection control executed when a music is selected and determined using a music selection screen displayed as a submenu screen.

  FIG. 47A shows a music selection screen display example that can be displayed on the effect display device 909. FIG. 47B shows a circulating image of the music image on the music selection screen. FIG. 47C shows music image scroll speed setting data. FIG. 47D shows music image scroll mode setting data. FIG. 47E shows the scroll mode effect pattern data of the music image.

  When the music selection setting is selected and determined on the main menu screen in accordance with the player's operation, the effect display device 909 displays a music selection screen as shown in FIG. On the music selection screen, music images corresponding to a plurality of types (for example, six types) of music as shown in FIG. 47B can be displayed as selectable music images 9096 or non-selectable music images 9097. Music images corresponding to a plurality of types of music can be scroll-displayed in the left direction or the right direction in accordance with the circulation order indicated by the arrows in the figure. The music image is an icon-shaped image on which information (hereinafter referred to as music information) relating to music such as a music name is shown. In the scroll display of the music image, the music image moves in the left direction or the right direction as shown by an arrow in FIG. 47A in response to the stick controller 9031A being operated in the left direction or the right direction. Is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 47B, the music image displayed on the music selection screen includes a selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the selectable music that can be selected for playback, and a music image for playback. A non-selectable music image 9097 corresponding to a non-selectable music that cannot be selected yet is included. The selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097 are displayed separately based on the following conditions. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, predetermined music (for example, first music, second music) is initially set as a selectable music, and other music (for example, third music to sixth music) is selected. Initially set as impossible music. Then, every time a specific music addition condition is satisfied, control for adding and increasing selectable music is executed by the effect control CPU 90201. Thereby, the non-selectable music image 9097 can be changed to a selectable music image 9096 every time the music addition condition is satisfied.

  The specific music addition condition is, for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, the effect control CPU 90201 counts the number of times of variable display) of the number of times of special symbol variable display executed since the power is turned on the day (for example). For example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 47A, on the music selection screen, a selectable music image 9096 and a non-selectable music image 9097 can be displayed together. Thereby, the interest of the player regarding the effect of reproducing the music can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The selectable music image 9096 is displayed as an icon image in a display form in which an image such as music information is indicated by a color image. On the other hand, the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed as an icon image in a display mode in which an image such as music information is displayed as a gray image (monochrome image using gray or the like). In FIG. 47A, in order to distinguish the selectable music image 9096 of the color image from the non-selectable music image 9097 of the gray image, the non-selectable music image 9097 is shown by hatching. As described above, the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097 are displayed in different display modes, so that it is visually determined which music can be selected (reproduced) from among a plurality of types of music. It is easily distinguishable.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, a selection area 9098 is provided in the central part of the music selection screen as an area in which the music image to be selected can be displayed and stopped (stop display). In the music selection screen, one of the selectable music images 9096 is displayed in a staying manner (stopped display) in a display mode in which all the images are displayed in the selection area 9098. In the music selection screen, the non-selectable music image 9097 is not staying displayed (stopped) in the selection area 9098.

[Scroll display mode on the music selection screen]
When the stick controller is tilted once in the left direction, the music image is scrolled and displayed in the left direction in accordance with the operation. On the other hand, when the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, the music image is scrolled and displayed in the right direction according to the operation. In the scroll display in either the left direction or the right direction, the selectable music image 9096 displayed in the selection area 9098 before the scroll display is displayed in accordance with the circulation order of the music images in accordance with one operation. After the scroll display, the music image is changed to a new selectable music image 9096. When such scroll display is performed, the non-selectable music image 9097 is scroll-displayed according to the circulation order of the music image, but after being temporarily displayed on the selection area 9098 (display that temporarily remains). , Display to move.

  As described below, the scroll display according to the operation of the stick controller is performed when the music image in the next circulation order in the circulation order in the scroll direction is the selectable music image 9096 and in the non-selectable music image 9097. It is executed in a different scroll display mode from a certain time.

  In the scroll display of the music image, the music image in the next circulation order in the circulation order in the scroll display direction of the selectable music image 9096 that has been staying displayed in the selection area 9098 before the operation can be selected. In some cases, the selectable music image 9096 of the next circulation order is newly displayed in the selection area 9098 after scroll display, so that the selectable music image 9096 displayed in the selection area 9098 is changed. Is done.

  That is, when the music image in the first circulation order is the selectable music image 9096, the selectable music image 9096 is newly displayed in the selection area 9098 after scroll display. As a specific example, in the case where scroll display is performed in the left direction, a music image corresponding to the first music that has been retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 before scroll display is the selectable music image 9096, which is shown in FIG. As described above, when the music image corresponding to the second music in the next circulation order of the first music is the selectable music image 9096, the selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the second music is newly selected after the scroll display. The stay is displayed at 9098.

  On the other hand, in the scroll display, the music image in the next circulation order in the circulation order in the scroll direction of the selectable music image 9096 that has been displayed in the selection area 9098 before the operation is the non-selectable music image 9097. In such a case, after the first non-selectable music image 9097 in the cyclic order is displayed once in the selection area 9098 (display that temporarily stops), the next display is performed by scroll display regardless of the player's action. The selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the next or subsequent order of the non-selectable music image 9097 in the circulation order is newly displayed in the selection area 9098 so that the selectable music image is displayed in the selection area 9098. 9096 is changed.

  That is, when the music image in the next circulation order is the non-selectable music image 9097, after the scroll display, the non-selectable music image 9097 in the cyclic order including the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed. A display that passes through the selection area 9098 while being temporarily displayed on the selection area 9098 is displayed, and a selectable music image 9096 in the subsequent circulation order is newly displayed in the selection area 9098, whereby the selection area 9098 is displayed. The selectable music image 9096 that is staying displayed is changed. As a specific example, in the case of scrolling in the right direction, the music image corresponding to the first music that is staying displayed in the selection area 9098 before the scroll display is the selectable music image 9096, as shown in FIG. Thus, the music images corresponding to the sixth music, the fifth music, and the fourth music in the next circulation order of the first music are the non-selectable music images 9097, and the third music in the next circulation order is the third music. When the music image corresponding to the music is the selectable music image 9096, the unselectable music image 9097 corresponding to each of the sixth music, the fifth music, and the fourth music is displayed on the selection area 9098 in the scroll display. A display that passes over the selection area 9098 while being temporarily displayed (display that stays temporarily) is displayed, and after scrolling display, selection corresponding to the third music is possible Song image 9096 is retained displayed to the newly selected region 9098.

  As described above, on the music selection screen, the selectable music image 9096 that stays in the selection area 9098 is displayed as the selectable image corresponding to the next order by scroll display according to one operation by the player. It can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, in the areas on the left and right sides of the selection area 9098 on the music selection screen, the music image in the circulation order immediately before the selectable music image 9096 stopped and displayed in the selection area 9098; Each of the music images in the next circulation order is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which a part of the image is displayed. Thereby, the selectable music image 9096 has a case where all the images are stopped and a part of the images are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the non-selectable music image 9097 does not always stop and display all of the image, but may stop and display a part of the image. With respect to the non-selectable music image 9097, a part of the image is stopped and displayed, so that it is possible to recognize that there is a non-selectable image, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Scroll display setting on the music selection screen]
The scroll display on the music selection screen is based on the scroll speed setting data in FIG. 47 (C), the scroll mode setting data in FIG. 47 (D), and the scroll mode effect pattern data in FIG. 47 (E). (Production pattern) is set and executed.

  FIG. 47C shows scroll speed setting data used for setting the scroll speed when performing scroll display on the music selection screen. As shown in FIG. 47 (C), when scroll display is executed on the music selection screen, the scroll speed is set as follows.

  47B. The selectable music image 9096 and the selectable music image 9096, such as between the first music image and the second music image in FIG. 47B and between the second music image and the third music image. In the scroll display between each other, the first speed V1 is set as the scroll speed. 47B, the non-selectable music image 9097 and the non-selectable music image 9097, such as between the fourth music image and the fifth music image, and between the fifth music image and the sixth music image. Scroll display between and the second speed V2 is set as the scroll speed. In the scroll display between the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097, such as between the first music image and the sixth music image in FIG. 47B, the second speed V2 is the scroll speed. Set as As shown in FIG. 47C, the second speed V2 is higher than the first speed V1.

  As described above, with regard to the scroll display on the music selection screen, the scroll speed differs between selectable music images and between non-selectable music images. Thereby, the effect pattern of the effect using scroll display comes to be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. Regarding the speed of the scroll display, the second speed V2 between the non-selectable music images is higher than the first speed V1 between the selectable music images. This makes it possible to reduce the period during which the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  FIG. 47D shows scroll mode setting data used when setting the scroll mode when performing scroll display on the music selection screen. The scroll mode is an effect pattern mode for scroll display. The scroll mode includes a low-speed scroll mode and a high-speed scroll mode.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (D), when the selection area 9098 is the reference position and the next cyclic order of scrolling is the selectable music image 9096, the low-speed scroll mode is selected. For example, when the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 and scrolls to the left, the second circulation image is the second music image that is the selectable music image 9096. In some cases, the slow scroll mode is selected. On the other hand, when the selection area 9098 is the reference position and the next cyclic order of scrolling is the unselectable music image 9097, the high speed scroll mode is selected. For example, when the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 while scrolling to the right, the sixth music image whose next circulation order is the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed. When this is the fast scroll mode is selected.

  FIG. 47E shows effect pattern data of scroll display for each scroll mode. In the low-speed scroll mode, the music image is moved at the first speed V1, and the scroll display is executed in an effect pattern in which the selectable music image 9096 of the next circulation order is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098. For example, in the case where the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 and scrolls to the left, the music image is moved at the first speed V1 in the low-speed scroll mode. Scroll display is performed in an effect pattern in which the second music image that is the selectable music image 9096 of the next circulation order is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098.

  In the high-speed scroll mode, the music image is moved at the second speed V2, and a skip display is displayed in which the music image 9097 that cannot be selected in the next circulation order is temporarily displayed in the selection area 9098 (a display that temporarily stops). Finally, scroll display is executed in an effect pattern in which the next selectable music image in the next order after the non-selectable image in the next circulation order is retained in the selected area. For example, when the first music image that is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098 and is scrolled to the right, the music image is moved at the second speed V2 in the high-speed scroll mode. The sixth music image, the fifth music image, and the fourth music image, which are non-selectable music images 9097 in the next circulation order, are displayed in a skipped manner while being displayed in the selection area 9098, and finally selected. The scroll display is executed in an effect pattern in which the third music image, which is the possible music image 9096, is retained and displayed in the selected area. The non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed once in the selection area 9098, so that the player's interest in the production can be increased. In addition, since the music corresponding to the unselectable music image 9097 cannot be selected, it is not left displayed, so that the player can misunderstand that the music can be selected.

  Data for displaying the music image shown in FIG. 47 (A), data on the circulation order of the music image shown in FIG. 47 (B), scroll speed setting data shown in FIG. 47 (C), and FIG. 47 (D). Each of the scroll mode setting data and the scroll mode effect pattern data shown in FIG. 47 (E) is stored in the effect control ROM, and the scroll display is performed when the scroll display is executed on the music selection screen. Used for various settings.

[Music selection process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a music selection process executed by the effect control CPU 90201. By executing the music selection process described below, the music to be played can be played by the player's operation at a specific timing such as when a customer waiting demonstration display (abbreviation for demonstration display) or at the start of a big hit gaming state. Selectable. This makes it possible to select and determine the music to be played during the game according to the player's intention (preference).

  When the music selection process is executed during the customer-waiting demonstration display, the music that has been selected and played is played back during the variation display of the effect design. When the music selection process is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, the music selected and determined is reproduced, for example, during the big hit gaming state. Below, the example which performs a music selection process at the time of the start of a jackpot game state is demonstrated.

  As described above, in the state where the music selection setting item (not shown) is selected and determined on the main menu screen and the music selection screen shown in FIG. According to the operation of the stick controller and the operation of the push button, the selection of the music to be played during the game can be determined.

  Specifically, in the state where the music selection screen is displayed, the displayed music image is scrolled in the left direction or the right direction based on the player tilting the stick controller leftward or rightward. Thus, a selection switching operation for switching music images staying and displayed in the selection area 9098 is possible. Further, in response to a push operation on the push button, a determination operation for determining a music to be played during the game as a music corresponding to the music image staying in the selection area 9098 is possible.

  When the music selection process is executed at the time of the customer waiting demonstration display, it is executed for a predetermined period during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration display in the effect control process. Further, when the music selection process is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state, it is executed over a predetermined period during execution of the customer waiting demonstration display in the effect control process. Note that the music selection process may be executed not only at the time of the customer waiting demonstration display and at the start of the big hit gaming state, but also at other timings such as at the start of the probability change state or at the start of the short time state.

In the following, an example in which the music selection process is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state will be described.
In the music selection process, the effect control CPU 90201 first determines whether or not the music selection flag is set in order to check whether or not the music selection screen is being displayed (S90720). . The music selection flag is a flag for determining whether or not the music selection screen (FIG. 47A) is displayed, and when the music selection setting item is selected and determined on the main menu screen. This is set in a main menu display process that is executed separately from the music selection process, and is reset in S90730 to be described later. For example, the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the music selection screen is displayed if the music selection flag is set, and determines that the music selection screen is not displayed if it is not set.

  When the music selection flag is not set (S90720; No), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the music selection process. On the other hand, when the music selection flag is set (S90720; Yes), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not a selection switching operation has been performed by the stick controller (S90721). Specifically, in S90721, the presence / absence of the selection switching operation is determined based on the detection signal from the sensor.

  When there is no selection switching operation (S90721; No), the effect control CPU 90201 executes processing of S90727 described later. On the other hand, when there is a selection switching operation (S90721; Yes), the production control CPU 90201 determines the next order of the circulation order of the music images in the scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display) according to the selection switching operation. It is determined whether or not the music image 9096 can be selected (S90722).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, the scrolling display to the left is displayed. It is determined whether or not the second music image in the circulation order next to the first music image is the selectable music image 9096. As shown in FIG. 47B, when the second music image is a selectable music image 9096 (S90722; Yes), the process of S90725 described later is executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, the scrolling display in the right direction is displayed. It is determined whether or not the sixth music image in the circulation order next to the first music image is the selectable music image 9096. As shown in FIG. 47B, when the sixth music image is a non-selectable music image 9097 (S90722; No), the process of S90723 described later is executed.

  If it is determined in S90722 that the next order is not the selectable music image 9096, the first selectable music image 9096 after the next order in the cyclic order of the music images in scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display). Is determined as the next staying display image (S90723). Then, scroll display for moving the next staying display image determined in S90723 to the selection area 9098 in the direction in which the selection switching operation is performed is executed in the high speed mode (S90724).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once in the right direction, the scrolling display to the left is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47B in the circulation order, the music image in the circulation order next to the first music image is the sixth music image as the non-selectable music image 9097. In this case, since the first selectable music image 9096 after the next order of the sixth music image is the third music image, the third music image is determined as the next staying display image (S90723). Then, scroll display for moving the third music image to the selection area 9098 in the right direction is executed in the high speed mode (S90724). As a result, right-direction scroll display in the high-speed mode is executed, and in the selection area 9098, these music images are displayed in the order of the sixth music image, the fifth music image, and the fourth music image, and the skip display is displayed. Finally, the third music image is retained and displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S90722 that the next order is the selectable music image 9096, the music image in the next order in the circulation order of the music images in scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display) is displayed next time. The image is determined (S90725). Then, the scroll display for moving the next stay display image determined in S90725 to the selection area 9098 in the direction in which the selection switching operation is performed is executed in the low speed mode (S90726).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the music image staying displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image, and the stick controller is tilted once in the left direction, the left scroll display is performed. As shown in FIG. 47B, the music image in the next cyclic order of the first music image is the second music image as the selectable music image 9096. In this case, the second music image that is the selectable music image 9096 in the next order of the first music image is determined as the next staying display image (S90725). Then, the scroll display for moving the next stay display image determined in S90725 to the left to the selection area 9098 is executed in the low speed mode (S90726). As a result, right-direction scroll display in the low speed mode is executed, and the second music image is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098.

  After execution of S90724, after execution of S90726, or when it is determined that there is no selection switching operation in S90721, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation for determining the selected music piece (S90727). Specifically, in S90727, the presence / absence of the determination operation by the push button is determined based on the detection signal from the sensor.

  When there is no determination operation (S90727; No), the production control CPU 90201 ends the music selection process. On the other hand, when there is a determination operation (S90727; Yes), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the music that is staying displayed in the selection area 9098 to be played during the game (the music that is played during the big hit gaming state). (S90728). For example, when the determination operation is performed in a state where the first music image is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098, the music to be played during the game is determined as the first music corresponding to the first music image.

  The effect control CPU 90201 determines the music that is staying in the selection area 9098 to be played during the game (the music that is played during the big hit gaming state) (S90728), and then returns to the main menu screen from the music selection screen. Display is made (S90729). Then, the music selection flag is reset (S90730), and the music selection process is terminated. As described above, when the music to be played during the game is determined on the music selection screen, the display of the music selection screen is terminated and the main menu screen is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the music selection flag is not reset until the determination operation is performed, but a predetermined period after the music selection flag is set or after the selection operation is last performed. May be determined as the music corresponding to the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 when the predetermined period has elapsed, the music selection screen may be switched to the menu screen, and the music selection flag may be reset. In addition, the determination operation returns to the menu screen from the music selection screen. However, by providing a “return” button on the music selection screen, selecting the “return” button, and pressing the push button 9031B. The music selection flag may be reset and the menu screen may be returned.

(1) The gaming machine of the above modification is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 901) that performs a game,
A music playback means (such as CPU 90201 for effect control) capable of playing back music in a specific period (such as a period in a big hit gaming state);
Music selection screen display means capable of displaying a music selection screen (music selection screen of FIG. 47, etc.) capable of selecting a music to be reproduced from a plurality of types of music (reproduction effects of the plurality of types of music of FIG. 47). Prepared,
The music reproduced in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (music A to F, etc.)
The music playback means plays back a specific part that is a part of the currently selected music and is different from the head of the music at the time of selecting the music (such as the production control CPU 90201 playing the chorus part).
The music selection screen includes a selectable image (selectable music image 9096, etc. in FIG. 47) that can specify selectable music (first music to third music in FIG. 47, etc.) and a music that is not yet selectable ( 47 can be displayed together with a non-selectable image (such as non-selectable music image 9097 in FIG. 47) that can specify the fourth music to the sixth music in FIG. 47 (FIG. 47A, etc.).

According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.
(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The effect selection screen displays a part of the non-selectable image as the non-selectable image (displays a part of the non-selectable music image 9097 indicated by diagonal lines in FIG. 47A as a gray image). ).

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize that there is an unselectable image, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The production selection screen is
According to the player's action (selection switching operation by left / right operation of the stick controller, etc.), a plurality of the selectable images and the selection impossible in a predetermined order (such as the circulation order of the music images shown in FIG. 47B). An image (such as a music image shown in FIG. 47B) can be scroll-displayed (such as a scroll display shown in the arrow direction in FIG. 47A),
In the predetermined display area (selection area 9098 in FIG. 47), the selectable image is retained (displayed in the selection area 9098 in FIG. 47), thereby specifying the effect to be executed (corresponding to the music to be played back). Specify the music image in the center of the screen)
The effect selection screen display means includes
An image corresponding to the next order (normal order) of the selectable images that are staying displayed in a predetermined display area is the next of the first music that is the selectable image (selectable music image 9096 in FIG. 47A). When the second music image corresponding to the second music in the circulation order is a selectable music image 9096 or the like), the selection corresponding to the next order is performed by scroll display according to one operation by the player. In the low-speed scroll mode (FIG. 47E) in which scroll display is executed and the next selectable music image 9096 is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 by S90725 and S90726 in FIG. Scroll display etc.)
An image corresponding to the next order (reverse order) of the selectable images that are staying displayed in the predetermined display area is the non-selectable image (the sixth of the next circulation order of the first music in FIG. 47A). When the sixth music image corresponding to the music is a non-selectable music image 9097 or the like), the selection in the next order in the predetermined display area is performed by scroll display according to one operation by the player. After the impossible image is once displayed, the selectable image corresponding to the next order of the next non-selectable image in the next order is displayed in the predetermined display area by scroll display regardless of the player's action. The staying display is performed (according to S90723 and S90724 in FIG. 48, the scrolling display is performed and the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed while being temporarily displayed, and finally the next circulation order is displayed. Like the scroll display in the high speed scroll mode (FIG. 47 (E)) staying displaying selectable music image 9096 in descending.), It may be.

  According to such a configuration, the non-selectable image is once displayed in the predetermined display area, so that the player's interest in the production can be increased.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display is between the selectable images (such as the first speed V1 in FIG. 47B) and between the non-selectable images (the first in FIG. 47B). 2 speed V2 etc.) (the scroll speed ratio “V1 <V2” etc. in FIG. 47C).

  According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved because scroll speeds differ.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display is higher between the non-selectable images (speed V2 in FIG. 47B) than between the selectable images (speed V1 in FIG. 47B, etc.). Etc.) may be higher (the scroll speed ratio “V1 <V2”, etc. in FIG. 47C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the period during which non-selectable images are displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(6) In any of the gaming machines according to (3) to (5) above,
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display varies depending on the operation period of the player ([example in which the scroll speed varies depending on the operation period of the player)].

  According to such a structure, the interest of a game can be improved because a scroll speed changes with a player's operation | movement period.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 22 by the small hit of the second special symbol may be provided. For example, a pattern having a large number of short opens and a pattern having a small number of short opens may be provided. Further, the type of symbol displayed as the effect symbol may be varied depending on the type of the open pattern. Specifically, if the opening pattern is advantageous to the player (such as a large number of times of opening), it is stopped with a red symbol combination, and if the opening pattern is disadvantageous to the player (such as the number of times of opening is small), the blue pattern You may make it stop by a symbol combination. Further, if it is an advantageous opening pattern, it is possible to win a small hit with the symbol “4”, and if it is an unfavorable opening pattern, it may be won with a symbol “2”. Note that the opening time may be different from the number of opening times.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a series of premium videos is played even when there is a small-bonus storage between big hits has been described. However, the video streamed may be different depending on whether there is a small hitting hold memory between the big hits and when there is no small hit holding memory between the big hits. Further, the type of premium video may be different depending on the number of small hits between big hits (one or two small hits).

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the first acquired image 90196 when it is controlled to the small hit state during the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, and the second acquired image 90197 or the second acquired image in other periods. The three acquired images 90198 may be in the same display mode. Further, the first acquired image 90196 and the third acquired image 90198 that are in a state where there is a small hit within the hold may be the same. In addition, the number of acquired images may not be the sum of the number of winnings per unit, but may indicate the total number for each winning in a single opening. The number may be displayed continuously.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the description related to the change of music as a selection effect that can be selected by the player has been described. However, the effect changed by the selection effect may be other than music. For example, the effect changed by the selection effect may be a background change effect, a video change effect, a character change effect, or the like. In such a case, the effect may be taken over when the one that has been selected once is selected again. Specifically, in a gaming machine that can be reserved to change the background by operating a push button, the user tried to change the background, but when he wanted to keep the current background, the production of the current background It may be continued (for example, music in the current background continues to flow).

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music selection effect can be executed during the big hit has been described. However, the music selection effect may be executed during the rush or may be executed in the non-KT state. In such a case, a plurality of periods in which the selection effect can be executed are provided, and the music is divided into a period when the number of fluctuations is small (1 to 10 times) and a period when the number of fluctuations is large (70 to 100 times). The selection effect may be executed. The selection effect may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration. For example, a menu screen can be opened by operating a push button during a customer waiting demonstration, and the volume and light intensity of a pachinko machine can be adjusted and the execution frequency of the production can be changed in the menu screen. Good.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45E, the case where the currently executed item is changed to the character “return” has been described. However, instead of changing to characters, the color or shape of the currently executed item may be different.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music is reproduced from the chorus portion of the music has been described. Depending on the music, it may be played back from a part other than “rust” (A melody etc.), or the part played back by the music may be different.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker is repeatedly released, that is, a round gaming period, but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period in which the attacker opens repeatedly (round game period), and an ending effect period that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It is good also as a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  (9) In the above-described various music selection controls, medals are inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the stop button is operated by the player. When the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the combination of the symbols when the combination of the symbols to be stopped is a specific symbol combination, it can be applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. is there. In the slot machine, music selection and determination operations may be executed by a push button or a cross key provided on the housing.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (11) As this embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described. You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, a specific value exceeding 0% has been described as a “ratio (ratio, probability)” as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, after the variable display result when the display result of the variable display is determined to be the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state is unconditionally entered. An example of controlled probability state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable prize ball device 9020. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (15) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 901 ... Pachinko machine 909 ... Production display device 9015 ... Variable winning ball device 9022 ... Special variable winning ball device 90200 ... Production control microcomputer 90560 ... Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game,
Control means for controlling the operation of the gaming machine;
Transfer means for transferring data from the first storage means to the second storage means,
The transfer means transfers the control data used by the control means when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the notification data used for notification is more effective than the presentation data used for presentation. Priority transfer
The control means can monitor the state of the gaming machine in parallel with the transfer of the effect data, and can execute notification according to the state of the gaming machine using the notification data.
further,
Display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects selectable by the player;
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items;
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected in the selection effect means;
The display means is capable of displaying an item corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selection effect.
The production execution means
When an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect is selected in a state where the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed,
In a state where the first effect is being executed, if an item corresponding to the first effect is selected again, the game is executed by taking over the state of the first effect being executed. Machine.